Xerox 4505 ps, 4510 ps laser printer User’s Guide

Xerox 4505 ps, 4510 ps laser printer User’s Guide
Add to My manuals

Xerox 4505/4505ps Desktop Laser Printers offer advanced features that ensure high-quality Xerox printing. With a print speed of five pages per minute, a resolution of 600 dpi and 300 dpi, and a monthly page volume of up to 10,000 pages, these printers are ideal for single-user or networked printing. Whether you're printing text documents, graphics, or photos, the Xerox 4505/4505ps will deliver professional-looking results.

advertisement

Assistant Bot

Need help? Our chatbot has already read the manual and is ready to assist you. Feel free to ask any questions about the device, but providing details will make the conversation more productive.

Xerox 4505, 4505ps, 4510, 4510ps User’s Guide | Manualzz

AUG-TITL Page -1 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, February 7, 1995 12:20 PM

The Xerox

4505/4505ps and

4510/4510ps

Desktop Laser Printers

User’s Guide

AUG-TITL Page 0 Black,Red Tuesday, February 7, 1995 12:20 PM

Xerox Corporation

701 South Aviation Blvd.

El Segundo, CA

90245

USA

Xerox Canada, Limited

5650 Yonge Street

North York, Ontario

Canada

M2M 4G7

Americas Operations

200 First Stamford Place

Greenwich Avenue

Stamford, CT

06904-2343

USA

Rank Xerox, Limited

Parkway

Marlow

Buckinghamshire

S17 1YL

United Kingdom

Copyright

1994 Xerox Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright protection claimed includes all forms of matters of copyrightable materials and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen such as styles, templates, icons, screen displays, looks, etc.

Printed in France.

Xerox

, Rank Xerox, and all product names and product numbers mentioned in this publication are trademarks.

Adobe

and PostScript

are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

TrueRes is a trademark of DP-Tek. PCL, HP, LaserJet, Intellifont, and

Resolution Enhancement Technology (RET) are trademarks of

Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM is a trademark of International Business

Machines Corporation. Microsoft, Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Word, MS, and MS-DOS are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Univers is a trademark of Linotype AG or its subsidiaries. WordPerfect is a trademark of

WordPerfect Corporation. Centronics is a trademark of Centronics

Corporation. Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer,

Incorporated. OnPage is a trademark of Computer:applications, Inc. All other product names are trademarks/ tradenames of their respective owners.

PCL

and

PCL 5e

are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company. This printer contains an emulation of the Hewlett Packard PCL 5e command language, recognizes HP PCL 5e commands, and processes these commands in a manner compatible with Hewlett Packard LaserJet printer products.

Notice

Specifications described in this publication are subject to change without notice. Use of some features may be limited by your hardware or software configuration. Contact your dealer, Xerox or Rank Xerox for details.

AUG-TOC Page 1 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:42 AM

Table of Contents

Chapter 1

Introduction

...................................................

1-1

Overview 1-2

Sharing the Printer 1-5

Memory Considerations 1-6

Chapter 2

Handling Paper

.............................................

2-1

Overview 2-3

Paper Input 2-4

Paper Output 2-5

Paper Specifications 2-6

Paper Trays 2-8

Loading Paper 2-14

Selecting a Paper Source 2-22

Chapter 3

Using the Control Panel

..............................

3-1

Overview 3-3

Control Panel Features 3-4

Navigating the Menu System 3-8

Main Menu System 3-12

Language 3-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

i

AUG-TOC Page 2 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:42 AM

T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s

PCL Menu 3-15

PostScript Menu 3-29

Interface Menu 3-37

System Menu 3-57

Test Menu 3-61

Reset Menu 3-65

Printer Settings that Affect Memory 3-67

Chapter 4

Using Fonts

....................................................

4-1

Overview 4-3

Fonts Resident on the Printer 4-5

Adding Fonts 4-9

Selecting a Font 4-12

Downloading Fonts 4-13

Chapter 5

Adding Printer Options

...............................

5-1

Overview 5-2

Installing a SIMM 5-4

Installing a Font Card 5-19

Chapter 6

Maintaining the Printer

..............................

6-1

Overview 6-2

Replacing the EP Cartridge 6-3

Fuser Cleaning Cycle 6-9

Adjusting the Print Density 6-12

Cleaning the Printer 6-13

Transporting the Printer 6-14

Chapter 7

Troubleshooting

...........................................

7-1

Overview 7-2

Displayed Control Panel Messages 7-5

Paper Jams 7-19

Printer Operational Problems 7-26

ii

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-TOC Page 3 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:42 AM

T a b l e o f C o n t e n t s

Print Quality Problems 7-29

Appendix A

Printer and Cable Specifications

..............

A-1

4505 and 4505ps Printer Specifications A-2

4510 and 4510ps Printer Specifications A-4

Cable Specifications A-7

Appendix B

Printer Commands (Escape Sequences)

...

B-1

Xerox-Unique Settings B-2

PCL Printer Commands B-3

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands B-21

Control Codes B-25

Appendix C

I/O Port Polling

..............................................

C-1

Appendix D

Ordering Information

.................................

D-1

Printer Options D-2

Additional Order Items D-7

Appendix E

Environmental Specifications

....................

E-1

Glossary

.......................................................................

GL-1

Index

........................................................................

IX-1

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

iii

AUG-TOC Page 4 Black Friday, February 3, 1995 12:42 AM

iv

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH01 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM

Chapter 1

Introduction

1 r e t p a h C

Overview

...............................................................................

1-2

Printer Components 1-3

Factory Settings 1-4

Sharing the Printer

...............................................................

1-5

Memory Considerations

.......................................................

1-6

C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n

1-1

AUG-CH01 Page 2 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM

O v e r v i e w

Overview

The Xerox 4505, 4505ps, 4510, and 4510ps Desktop Laser

Printers offer the most cost-effective, best price-performance solution to single-user or networked printing of any advanced laser printer in their class.

At

five

pages per minute for the 4505/4505ps and

ten

pages per minute for the 4510/4510ps, these printers provide technically advanced features to ensure the high quality

Xerox printing you have come to expect:

• 600 dpi and 300 dpi resolutions

• Up to 10,000 pages per month for the 4505/4505ps

• Up to 20,000 pages per month for the 4510/4510ps

• Power saver mode

• Remote User Interface (RUI)

• TrueRes, for smooth edges and enhanced resolution

• Optional lower base with 500-sheet, 250-sheet, or

30-envelope capacity

• Optional 250-sheet trays supporting a variety of paper sizes

• Multipurpose (MP) tray for single-sheet manual feeding or small quantity specialized printing

• Memory capacity up to 16 MBytes

• Small footprint

• PCL 5e emulation and PostScript Level 2 PDLs (page description languages)

• Automatic switching between PCL emulation (hereinafter referred to as PCL) and PostScript (when the PostScript option is installed)

• Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring network options, each with a variety of protocols

• Printing from up to

three

simultaneously-active ports on the 4505/4505ps and up to

five

on the 4510/4510ps

• User installable printer and options

1-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH01 Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM

O v e r v i e w

Printer

Components

The key printer components are called out in Figure 1.1.

Figure 1.1

Key printer components

Output Tray

Font Card Slots

Power Switch

Control Panel

Front Cover

Multipurpose (MP)

Paper Source

250-sheet Paper Tray

Network Port 1

Network Ports 2 & 3

(4510/4510ps only)

Serial Port

Parallel Port

Power Inlet

C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n

1-3

AUG-CH01 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM

O v e r v i e w

Factory

Settings

The printer is controlled by numerous settings whose values are pre-set at the factory. These values are called

factory settings

.

If the factory settings do not suit the needs of your printing environment, you can select a new setting in either of two ways:

Control Panel

on the printer. See

Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel

.

Remote User Interface

on the host computer. Refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide

.

1-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH01 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM

S h a r i n g t h e P r i n t e r

Sharing the

Printer

Particular care must be taken when changing settings for a printer being shared by users such as those on a local area network (LAN). When the printer is shared, settings must accommodate the

common

needs of users.

Considerations for a networked environment include the following:

• Downloading fonts and macros by individual users may consume printer memory. The sharing of downloaded fonts must be coordinated. See

Chapter 4: Using Fonts

,

“Downloading Fonts” (page 4-13)

.

• Switching between PCL and PostScript may purge downloaded data. See

Chapter 3: Using the Control

Panel

,

State Saving

(page 3-28) for PCL and

State Saving

(page 3-36) for PostScript.

• Changing settings for

Jam Recovery

,

Page Protection

,

State Saving

, or

Resolution

affect memory utilization. See

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

,

“Printer Settings that

Affect Memory” (page 3-67)

.

• The type of interface. (See page 3-37,

Appendix A

, and

Appendix C

.)

Auto Job End

should be page 3-53, page 3-56.)

On

. (See page 3-43, page 3-47,

Auto Continue

should be

On

. (See page 3-59.)

LANs generally require a system or network administrator, a person who orchestrates the use of the network. Refer to the installation guide packaged with your network option for more information.

C h a p t e r 1 : I n t r o d u c t i o n

1-5

AUG-CH01 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:00 PM

M e m o r y C o n s i d e r a t i o n s

Memory

Considerations

In today’s printing environments, technologies have advanced greatly but so have their corresponding memory requirements. To make use of specialized graphics features, fonts, and other applications on the market today, you may find it necessary to increase memory size.

From the factory, the 4505 and 4510 are equipped with 2 MB of resident base memory. The 4505ps and 4510ps are equipped with 2 MB of resident base memory plus one 4 MB

SIMM (single in-line memory module) for a total of 6 MB.

Maximum memory capacity is 16 MB.

• When is more memory needed?

— You receive out-of-memory error messages when printing.

See

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

,

“Printer

Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)

for more information on how certain printer settings may affect memory usage and performance. See also

“Minimum

Memory Requirements” (page 3-69)

.

— You determine that expanded capability for additional fonts, more complex documents, graphics, or higher resolution is needed.

See

Chapter 4: Using Fonts

,

“Downloading Fonts”

(page 4-13)

for more information on how fonts affect memory usage.

• How is more memory added?

— Install a SIMM (single in-line memory module).

SIMMs are small circuit boards with memory chips that can be installed on the printer controller board.

See

Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options

for more information on SIMM installation.

1-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

Chapter 2

Handling Paper

2 r e t p a h C

Overview

...............................................................................

2-3

Paper Input

............................................................................

2-4

Paper Output

........................................................................

2-5

Paper Specifications

.............................................................

2-6

Weight 2-6

Dimensions 2-6

Paper Trays

............................................................................

2-8

Standard Tray 2-9

Multipurpose Tray 2-11

Optional Lower Base 2-13

Loading Paper

.....................................................................

2-14

Loading the Standard or Lower Paper Tray 2-14

Feeding the Multipurpose Paper Tray 2-18

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-1

AUG-CH02 Page 2 Black,Red Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

Loading Letterhead, Pre-printed, Drilled, or Label Paper 2-20

Loading Envelopes 2-21

Selecting a Paper Source

....................................................

2-22

PCL Paper Sources 2-22

Printing a Page 2-23

Source Mapping Settings 2-25

Factory Source Mapping Settings 2-26

Source Mapping Examples 2-27

Example 1 2-27

Example 2 2-28

Example 3 2-29

Example 4 2-30

Example 5 2-31

Example 6 2-32

Example 7 2-33

Example 8 2-34

2-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

O v e r v i e w

Overview

This chapter provides specific information on

paper handling

:

• Paper specifications

• Paper sources and paper trays

• Manual feeding and loading of paper, including letterhead, pre-printed stationery, envelopes, labels, and transparencies

• Paper source mapping

• Printing

Note

In this guide,

paper source

refers to the slot or opening where paper enters the printer.

Paper tray

refers to the container or device that holds the paper.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-3

AUG-CH02 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r I n p u t

Paper

Input

Paper input sources are the slots or openings where paper enters the printer. As shown in Figure 2.1, the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers have as many as

three

paper input sources.

Figure 2.1

Paper input sources

Multipurpose (MP)

Paper Source

Standard Paper Source

Optional Lower Base

Paper Source

(250-sheet or

500-sheet)

2-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r O u t p u t

Paper

Output

As shown in Figure 2.2, printed output is delivered face down to the tray located on top of the printer. Output capacity is 250 sheets of standard weight paper.

Figure 2.2

Output tray

!

Caution

Depending on paper weight, you may find the output tray holds fewer than 250 sheets. Paper jams may occur if output capacity is exceeded.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-5

AUG-CH02 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Paper

Specifications

Factors such as embossing, special edges, and general paper quality affect paper handling.

Weight

Paper

weight

specifications include the following:

• 250-sheet and 500-sheet paper trays support paper weights of

60 gsm (16 lb)

to

105 gsm (28 lb)

.

• MP tray supports paper weights of

60 gsm (16 lb)

to

135 gsm (36 lb)

.

Note

For optimum printer performance, it is recommended that you use paper made for laser printers and transparency film made for Xerox laser printers and copiers.

Dimensions

Figure 2.3 shows paper

dimensions

in millimeters and inches.

Figure 2.3

Paper dimensions

Paper Size

A4

Letter

B5 (ISO)

Executive

A5

Folio

Dimensions

210 x 297 mm

8.27 x 11.69 inches

216 x 279 mm

8.5 x 11 inches

176 x 250 mm

6.93 x 9.84 inches

184 x 267 mm

7.25 x 10.5 inches

148 x 210 mm

5.83 x 8.27 inches

216 x 330 mm

8.5 x 13 inches

2-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Figure 2.3

Paper dimensions

(continued)

Paper Size

Legal

Dimensions

COM-10 Envelope

Monarch Envelope

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

216 x 356 mm

8.5 x 14 inches

105 x 241 mm

4.13 x 9.5 inches

98 x 191 mm

3.87 x 7.5 inches

110 x 220 mm

4.33 x 8.66 inches

162 x 229 mm

6.38 x 9.02 inches

Note

The Xerox printer driver supports all paper sizes in

Figure 2.3. However, if you do not install—or your application does not use—the Xerox printer driver, some of these paper sizes may not be available for your use. Refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide

for more information on the Xerox printer driver.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-7

AUG-CH02 Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r T r a y s

Paper

Trays

As shown in Figure 2.4, the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are packaged with one 250-sheet paper tray and one multipurpose (MP) tray. An optional lower base provides an additional tray, as shown in Figure 2.4.

Figure 2.4

Input trays

Multipurpose (MP) Tray

Standard Paper Tray

Optional 250-sheet Lower

Base with Paper Tray or

Optional 500-sheet Lower

Base with Paper Tray

2-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r T r a y s

Standard Tray

The 250-sheet tray packaged with the printer is called a

universal tray

because it is adjustable to a variety of paper sizes, as shown in Figure 2.5.

Figure 2.5

Universal tray

Paper

Capacity

(Sheets)

A4 250

Letter (8.5 x 11) 250

Executive 250

A5 250

10 OHP (Overhead Projector) Film

(transparency)

Label paper 10

† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.

‡ Tray capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. Maximum paper stack:

25mm/1 inch.

See

“Loading Paper” (page 2-14)

for further information on the universal tray.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-9

AUG-CH02 Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r T r a y s

Two other standard trays are available for the printer, as shown in Figure 2.6.

Figure 2.6

Additional standard trays

Optional Tray

Legal

Envelope

Paper

Capacity

(Sheets)

Folio (8.5 x 13) 250

Legal (8.5 x 14)

Letter (8.5 x 11)

250

250

COM-10 30

Monarch 30

DL 30

C5 30

† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.

‡ Tray capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper. Maximum paper stack:

25mm/1 inch.

Note

To use letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in the standard tray, see Figure 2.8 (page 2-20) for paper orientation. See Figure 2.9 (page 2-21) for envelope orientation.

2-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r T r a y s

Multipurpose

Tray

The multipurpose (MP) tray provides for

manually

feeding a single sheet or loading small quantities of paper, envelopes, transparencies, or labels (see Figure 2.7).

Figure 2.7

MP tray

A4

Letter (8.5 x 11)

B5 (ISO)

A5

Executive

Folio

Legal (8.5 x 14)

Monarch

Com-10

C5

DL

Transparencies

Labels

Paper

Capacity

(Sheets)

50

50

10

50

50

50

50

5

5

35

5

5

Less than 4 mm

(.15 in)

† Paper dimensions are listed on page 2-6.

‡ Capacity may differ based on the weight of the paper.

The maximum paper stack size for the MP tray is 4 mm (.15 inches)

.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-11

AUG-CH02 Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r T r a y s

Typical uses of the MP tray include:

• Printing a document whose first page is to be printed on letterhead and the rest from the standard tray. See

Figure 2.8 (page 2-20)

for the orientation of headed paper in the MP tray.

• Printing documents that require pages of special paper size, color, or other attribute.

Note

To use letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper in the MP tray, see Figure 2.8 (page 2-20) for paper orientation.

See Figure 2.9 (page 2-21) for envelope orientation.

2-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

P a p e r T r a y s

Optional Lower

Base

The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers accommodate one of two optional lower bases with a paper tray:

• The

250-sheet

lower base equipped with a universal tray

In the 250-sheet lower base, you can also use either the legal or envelope tray shown in

Figure 2.6 (page 2-10)

.

• The

500-sheet

lower base equipped with either an A4 or

Letter (8.5 x 11) tray

There is also an additional Letter tray or A4 tray available for the 500-sheet lower base.

To order a lower base or tray option, see

Appendix D: Ordering Information

.

Note

250-sheet or 30-envelope trays may be used for either the standard tray or the 250-sheet lower base.

500-sheet trays may be used in the 500-sheet lower base only.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-13

AUG-CH02 Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Loading Paper

Loading the

Standard or

Lower Paper Tray

To load paper into the standard or lower paper tray, follow the steps below.

1

When loading the standard tray, remove the multipurpose tray, if it is installed.

2-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 15 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

L o a d i n g P a p e r

2

Remove the tray from the printer.

Place the tray on a flat surface.

3

If necessary, adjust the end guide to the desired paper size and the side guide to its widest position.

!

Caution

Make sure that the end guide is positioned in the appropriate detent for the paper size installed in the tray. If the guide is not positioned in the detent, the printer may not correctly recognize the installed paper size.

See page 2-9 and page 2-13 for more information on the standard and lower paper trays.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-15

AUG-CH02 Page 16 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

L o a d i n g P a p e r

4

Load paper in the tray, making sure the paper is tucked under the metal corners.

Note

For best performance, load paper with curl side up.

If you are loading letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper, see

Figure 2.8

(page 2-20)

. If loading envelopes, see

Figure 2.9 (page 2-21)

.

5

If necessary, adjust the side guide to the correct paper width.

2-16

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 17 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

L o a d i n g P a p e r

6

Insert the paper tray in the printer.

Reinstall the multipurpose tray if it was removed at Step 1.

!

Caution

With a lower base installed, do not remove the standard tray while the printer is feeding from the lower tray.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-17

AUG-CH02 Page 18 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Feeding the

Multipurpose

Paper Tray

To feed paper into the multipurpose (MP) tray, follow the steps below.

It is assumed the MP tray has already been installed. If not, install it by referring to the

Setting Up Guide

packaged with the printer.

1

Adjust the side guides to the desired paper size.

See

“Multipurpose

Tray” (page 2-11)

.

2-18

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 19 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

L o a d i n g P a p e r

2

Feed paper or envelopes into the MP tray.

If you are loading letterhead, pre-printed stationery, or drilled paper, see

Figure 2.8

(page 2-20)

. See

Figure 2.9 (page 2-21)

for envelopes.

!

Caution

Whenever you open the front cover, you must first remove the MP tray. Reinsert it once you have closed the front cover.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-19

AUG-CH02 Page 20 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Loading

Letterhead,

Pre-printed,

Drilled, or

Label Paper

Figure 2.8 illustrates the paper orientation needed to print headed, pre-printed, drilled, or label paper.

Of course, you may need to adjust your software application’s printing margins to:

• Prevent overwriting the letterhead or pre-printed images.

• Prevent overwriting the drilled holes.

• Accommodate an individual label size.

Label paper may be loaded in the universal or MP tray only.

Note

Figure 2.8 Loading letterhead, pre-printed, drilled, or label paper

(face down)

(face up)

2-20

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 21 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

L o a d i n g P a p e r

Loading

Envelopes

Figure 2.9 illustrates the envelope orientation needed to print

COM-10, Monarch, DL, or C5 envelopes in the 30-envelope tray and the MP tray.

Note

Envelopes may

only

be loaded in the standard

30-envelope tray

or the

MP tray

. See Figure 2.6 (page 2-10) for more information on the envelope tray.

Figure 2.9

Loading envelopes

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-21

AUG-CH02 Page 22 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Selecting a

Paper Source

For a print job, your software application sends information, called the Printer Command Language (PCL), to the printer to communicate paper source and page size. How the printer interprets the PCL command for paper source and page size depends on the printer menu settings for

Source Mapping

and

MP Tray Size

. If PCL commands for paper source and page size are not sent to the printer, the printer menu settings for

Paper Size

and

Default Source

are used. See

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

for further information on these and all PCL Menu settings (page 3-18).

PostScript functions differently than PCL. Refer to the

PostScript Installation Instructions for more information.

Note

PCL Paper Sources

Paper source

is a term that describes the tray, feeder, or slot from which the printer feeds paper.

PCL, and therefore your printer, recognizes the six paper sources shown in Figure 2.10, which may, or may not, appear in your software application.

Figure 2.10 Six PCL paper sources

PCL Paper Source Alternate Names

Standard

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Upper, Paper Tray, Paper Cassette

Manual, Manual Feed

Envelope Manual Feed

Paper Deck

2-22

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 23 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Printing a Page

When a print job is received by the printer, the sequence to select the paper tray for each page is as follows:

1.

Page size is established.

If page size is not sent by the application, the PCL Menu setting called

Paper Size

is used.

2.

Paper source is established.

If a paper source is sent by the application, it will be one of the six PCL paper sources listed in

Figure 2.10

(page 2-22)

.

If paper source is not sent by the application, the PCL

Menu setting called

Default Source

is used. Some software applications have a paper source called “Auto

Select” or “Auto Sheet Feed.” When used, this results in a PCL paper source being omitted from the print job.

3.

When the printer is ready to print the page, tray sequence is established.

For the paper source chosen in the second step above, a tray or sequence of trays is taken from the PCL Menu

Source Mapping

setting for that source. For settings, see

Figure 2.11 (page 2-25)

.

4.

The printer searches in the tray or in any tray in the tray sequence for the correct page size from the first step above.

In a tray sequence, the trays are searched left to right as they appear in the

Source Mapping

setting. For example, for sequence “Std-Low-MP”, the standard tray is searched first, the lower tray second, and the MP tray third. The MP paper size is taken from the PCL Menu setting called

MP Tray Size

.

5.

If a tray with the correct paper size is found, the page is printed from that tray.

If no tray with the correct paper size is found, the tray sequence and paper size are displayed on the Control

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-23

AUG-CH02 Page 24 Black,Red Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Panel along with a message to load the correct paper size.

Printing halts.

— Put paper of the requested size in a tray in the tray sequence and the page will be printed.

— Or, press

Enter

to print from the first tray in the tray sequence, regardless of paper size. If that tray becomes empty, the next tray with the same paper size will be used. This source and size will be used until the printer receives a new page containing a

PCL paper source, page size, or reset command.

2-24

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 25 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Source Mapping

Settings

For each of the six PCL paper sources listed in

Figure 2.10

(page 2-22)

, a

Source Mapping

setting from Figure 2.11 is used. You may change settings depending on your printing needs. For details, see

“Factory Source Mapping Settings”

(page 2-26)

,

“Source Mapping Examples” (page 2-27)

, and

Source Mapping

(page 3-22).

Figure 2.11 Source Mapping settings

Source Mapping setting

Description

Standard

MP Tray

Standard-MP

MP-Standard

Lower

Standard-Lower

Lower-Standard

Lower-MP

Std-Low-MP

Low-Std-MP

MP-Lower

MP-Std-Low

MP-Low-Std

Tray or tray sequence to be used for each of the six PCL paper sources.

Additional settings that appear only when a lower base (page 2-13) is installed.

† Use sequences starting with MP to print the first pages of a print job on special paper stock by placing the required number of special stock sheets in the MP tray

(page 2-11).

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-25

AUG-CH02 Page 26 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Factory Source

Mapping Settings

Figure 2.12 shows the factory

Source Mapping

settings for the six PCL paper sources, and how the settings change when the optional lower base is installed and Reset Menus is implemented. See

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

,

“Reset

Menu” (page 3-65)

.

Figure 2.12 Factory settings for Source Mapping

PCL Paper Source

Without

Lower Base

With Lower Base

Standard

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Standard

MP Tray

MP Tray

Standard

Standard

MP Tray

Standard-Lower

MP Tray

MP Tray

Lower-Standard

Lower-Standard

MP Tray

Note

Only the Xerox printer driver allows access to the entire range of PCL paper source and source mapping settings specifically designed for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers. Refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide

.

2-26

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 27 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Source Mapping

Examples

Example 1

Review the following

Source Mapping

examples to take full advantage of the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps capabilities.

All examples assume that

Default Source

is set to

Standard

.

You do not have a lower base installed. You want to load as much paper in the printer as possible. You use only one size of paper. You do not do manual feeding.

1.

Load the standard and MP trays with regular paper stock.

2.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “Standard-MP.”

3.

Set

MP Tray Size

to the same size as the regular stock.

4.

In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to the standard tray.

The printer will pull paper from the standard tray until it is empty, then from the MP tray. When the standard tray is reloaded, the printer will pull paper from it again.

Note

The Source Mapping setting determines from where the printer pulls paper.

For the paper sources you intend not to use, always set Source

Mapping to the same setting as that used for your regular paper stock. You will avoid unexpected results if those paper sources are used by mistake.

Note

The examples suggest using specific PCL paper sources but generally you may substitute any source to fit your printing needs.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-27

AUG-CH02 Page 28 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

!

Caution

To avoid a paper jam, do not remove the standard or lower tray while the printer is feeding paper.

Example 2

You have a lower base installed. You want to load as much paper in the printer as possible. You use only one size of paper. You do not do manual feeding.

1.

Load the standard, lower, and MP trays with regular paper stock.

2.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “Low-Std-MP.”

3.

Set

MP Tray Size

to the same size as the regular stock.

4.

In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to the standard tray.

The printer will pull paper from the lower tray until it is empty, then from the standard tray until it is empty, then from the MP tray. When either the lower or standard tray is reloaded, the printer will pull paper from it again.

2-28

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 29 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Example 3

You do not have a lower base installed. You want to print mostly on Letter (8.5 x 11) paper but sometimes on Legal

(8.5 x 14). You do not intend to do manual feeding.

1.

Load the standard tray with Letter paper stock.

2.

Load the MP tray with Legal paper stock.

3.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “Standard.”

4.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Manual” to “MP Tray.”

5.

Set

MP Tray Size

to “Legal (8.5x14).”

6.

In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to:

— Standard tray for Letter pages.

— Manual (MP Tray) for Legal pages.

The printer will pull Letter paper from the standard tray. It will pull Legal paper from the MP tray.

Alternatively, you could set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “Standard-MP” and set your application paper source to the standard tray for both Letter and Legal size pages.

The printer will automatically switch between the trays according to the paper size requested

. The disadvantage is that Control Panel messages may be misleading. Whether alerting you to load Letter or Legal paper, the Control Panel will always display “Standard-MP” as the location to load that paper size. You must know which paper size goes into which tray.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-29

AUG-CH02 Page 30 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Example 4

You have a lower base installed. You also have the optional standard legal tray (page 2-10). You want to print mostly on

Letter (8.5 x 11) paper but sometimes on Legal (8.5 x 14). You intend to do manual feeding.

1.

Load the lower tray with Letter paper stock.

2.

Load the standard tray with Legal paper stock.

3.

Empty the MP tray.

4.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “Standard.”

5.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Lower” to “Lower.”

6.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Manual” to “MP Tray.”

7.

Set

Default Source

to “Lower” to take care of print jobs that do not contain a paper source selection.

8.

In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to:

— Lower tray for Letter pages.

— Standard tray for Legal pages.

— Manual (MP Tray) for pages to be manually fed.

The printer will pull Letter pages from the lower tray. It will pull Legal pages from the standard tray. For each manual page, the printer halts and the Control Panel displays a message requesting the correct size paper to be manually placed in the MP tray. Place one page in the MP tray and it will feed if the requested paper size is the same size as

MP

Tray Size

. If it is not, you must press

Enter

Alternatively, you could set the Source Mapping for “Lower” to “Lower-Standard” and set your application paper source to the lower tray for both Letter and Legal pages.

The printer will automatically switch between the trays according to the paper size requested

. The only disadvantage is that Control

Panel messages may be misleading. Whether alerting you to load Letter or Legal paper, the Control Panel will always

2-30

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 31 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Example 5

display “Lower-Standard” as the location to load that paper size. You must know which paper size goes into which tray.

You do not have a lower base installed. You want to print mostly on white A4 paper but sometimes on pre-printed A4 paper. You occasionally print on DL envelopes.

1.

Load the standard tray with white A4 paper stock.

2.

Load the MP tray with pre-preprinted A4 paper stock

(face down).

3.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “Standard.”

4.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Manual” and “Manual

Envelope” to “MP Tray.”

5.

Set

MP Tray Size

to “A4 (210x297)”

6.

In either your software application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to:

— Standard tray for white A4 pages.

— Manual (MP Tray) for pre-printed A4 pages.

— Manual (MP Tray) for DL envelopes. (You could have also set paper source to Manual Envelope for DL envelopes.)

The printer will pull white A4 paper from the standard tray. It will pull pre-printed A4 pages from the MP tray. For each DL envelope, the printer halts and the Control Panel displays a message requesting a DL envelope to be loaded in the MP tray. Remove the pre-printed paper and place one envelope in the MP tray. Press

Enter

to print.

Additionally, you might set

Source Mapping

for “Lower” and

“Large Capacity” sources to “MP Tray” so that you could select the lower tray or large capacity for pre-printed paper if more convenient.

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-31

AUG-CH02 Page 32 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Example 6

You have a lower base (with either a universal tray or an A4 tray) installed, and you have a DL envelope tray—see

Figure 2.6 (page 2-10)

. You want to print mostly on white A4 paper but sometimes on DL envelopes. Occasionally, you print on color or pre-printed A4 paper.

1.

Load the lower tray with white A4 paper stock.

2.

Insert the DL envelope tray, filled with DL envelopes, in the standard paper source.

3.

Load the MP tray with color or pre-printed A4 paper stock

(face down).

4.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “MP Tray.”

5.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Lower” to “Lower.”

6.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Manual” and “Manual

Envelope” to “Standard.”

7.

Set

MP Tray Size

to “A4 (210x297).”

8.

Set

Default Source

to “Lower” to cover print jobs that do not contain a paper source selection.

9.

In either your application or the Xerox printer driver, set paper source to:

— Lower tray for white A4 pages.

— Standard tray for color or pre-printed A4 pages.

— Manual for DL envelopes.

Because of the Source Mapping settings in steps 4-6, above, the printer will pull white A4 paper from the lower tray. It will pull DL envelopes from the standard tray. It will pull color or pre-printed A4 pages from the MP tray.

Make sure there is one sheet of A4 stationery in the MP tray each time you print this document.

2-32

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH02 Page 33 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Example 7

You do not have a lower base installed. You want to use pre-printed stationery for the first page and regular stock for the other pages of your document. Your software application has the capability to ask for the first page of a document from a different source than the remainder of the document.

The

Xerox PCL 5e emulation Windows printer driver also has this capability

. It is assumed your pre-printed stationery is the same size as your regular stock.

1.

Load the standard tray with regular paper stock.

2.

Load the MP tray with pre-printed stationery (face down).

3.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “Standard.”

4.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Lower” to “MP Tray.”

5.

Set

MP Tray Size

to the same size as your pre-printed stationery.

6.

In either your software application or the Xerox PCL 5e emulation Windows printer driver, set paper source for the first page to Lower and set paper source for the remaining pages to Standard.

The printer will pull the first page from the MP tray and all other pages from the standard tray.

Alternatively, you could substitute any paper source, except standard, for “Lower” in the fourth and sixth steps above.

Refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide

for more information about the printer driver.

Note

C h a p t e r 2 : H a n d l i n g P a p e r

2-33

AUG-CH02 Page 34 Black,Red,Cyan Tuesday, March 21, 1995 5:06 PM

S e l e c t i n g a P a p e r S o u r c e

Example 8

You do not have a lower base installed. You want to use pre-printed stationery for the first page and regular stock for the other pages of your document. Neither your software application nor your printer driver has the capability to ask for the first page of a document from a different source than the remainder of the document. It is assumed your pre-printed stationery is the same size as your regular stock.

1.

Load the standard tray with regular paper stock.

2.

Put one page of the pre-printed stationery in the MP tray

(face down).

3.

Set

Source Mapping

for “Standard” to “MP-Standard.”

4.

Set

MP Tray Size

to the same size as your pre-printed stationery.

5.

In your application, set paper source to Standard.

The printer will pull the first page from the MP tray and all other pages from the standard tray.

Make sure there is one sheet of pre-printed stationery in the

MP tray each time you print this document.

2-34

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

Chapter 3

Using the Control Panel

3 r e t p a h C

Overview

...............................................................................

3-3

Control Panel Features

.........................................................

3-4

The Display 3-4

The Indicator Lights 3-5

The Keys 3-6

Navigating the Menu System

..............................................

3-8

Menu System Indicators 3-9

Setting a Menu Option 3-10

Main Menu System

.............................................................

3-12

Language

.............................................................................

3-14

Language Options 3-14

PCL Menu

............................................................................

3-15

PCL Menu Hierarchy 3-15

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-1

AUG-CH03 Page 2 Black,Red Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

PCL Menu Options 3-18

PostScript Menu

..................................................................

3-29

PostScript Menu Hierarchy 3-30

PostScript Menu Options 3-32

Interface Menu

...................................................................

3-37

Interface Menu Hierarchy 3-37

Parallel Menu Options 3-41

Serial Menu Options 3-45

LocalTalk Menu Option 3-50

Ethernet Menu Options 3-51

Token Ring Menu Options 3-54

System Menu

......................................................................

3-57

System Menu Hierarchy 3-57

System Menu Options 3-58

Test Menu

............................................................................

3-61

Test Menu Hierarchy 3-61

Test Menu Functions 3-62

Reset Menu

.........................................................................

3-65

Reset Menu Hierarchy 3-65

Reset Menu Functions 3-65

Printer Settings that Affect Memory

.................................

3-67

Minimum Memory Requirements 3-69

3-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

O v e r v i e w

Overview

Shown in Figure 3.1, the Control Panel is both informative and interactive. Not only does it display status and user actions required, the Control Panel also enables you to change printer settings to control how the 4505/4505ps and

4510/4510ps printers operate in your environment.

Figure 3.1

Control Panel

This chapter describes the following:

• Control Panel display and keys

• Control Panel menu selections

• Guidelines for configuring the printer to meet your printing needs

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-3

AUG-CH03 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s

Control Panel

Features

The three major components of the Control Panel are shown in Figure 3.2:

Figure 3.2

Control Panel components

Three Indicator Lights

Two-line by 16-character Display

Eight Control Keys

The Display

The Control Panel display:

• Presents a

hierarchy of menu options and settings

to configure and control the printer.

See

“Navigating the Menu System” (page 3-8)

for information on the menu system hierarchy.

• Informs you of

printer status conditions

such as when toner is low, where to load paper, and so on.

See

“Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5)

for a complete list of messages.

3-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s

The Indicator

Lights

Shown in Figure 3.3, three

indicator

lights—also called LEDs for light-emitting diodes—show the activity status of the printer.

Figure 3.3

Indicator lights

Online Form Feed Ready

O n l i n e _ _ _

R e a d y

Figure 3.4 describes the function of each indicator light.

Figure 3.4

Indicator light functions

Indicator

Online

Form Feed

Ready

Description

The light is on when the printer is warmed up and available for printing.

The light goes off when:

• You press

Online

to take the printer offline.

• There is a failure or operation that makes the printer unavailable.

The light comes on when a

partial page

has been prepared for printing, rather than an entire page.

To eject the partial page, press

See

Figure 3.5 (page 3-6)

Form Feed

for information on the when the printer is offline.

Form Feed

key.

The light comes on when the printer is powered ON and remains lit unless a failure makes the printer unavailable.

The

Ready

light flashes to indicate that the printer is

receiving

data to print.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-5

AUG-CH03 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s

The Keys

As described in Figure 3.5, the Control Panel keypad consists of

eight

keys, identified as international symbols and labeled in English.

Figure 3.5

Control Panel keys and their functions

Key Description

Online

Toggles between

online

and

offline

.

When online, the printer is able to receive and print pages.

When offline, page processing and printing halts, but the printer is still able to respond to status requests. You must take the printer

offline

to:

• Access the menu system with

Menu

or

Reset

• Insert or remove a font card.

• Perform tasks such as forcing a form feed for a partially printed page.

The printer goes offline automatically when it has a fault condition such as a paper jam or an open cover. Use conditions.

Online

to put the printer back online after correcting such

The online message indicates a “closed” switch; that is, printing continues:

Online ___

The offline message indicates an “open” switch; that is, printing halts:

Offline _/_

Reset

Form Feed

Menu

Displays the Reset Menu and the first function:

Reset Printer

.

Press

Up

or

Down

repeatedly to step through the other Reset Menu functions one at a time. See

“Reset Menu” (page 3-65)

.

The printer must be offline for

Reset

to function.

Prints a partial page if one exists in the printer.

It does not send a blank sheet of paper through the printer.

The printer must be offline for the

Form Feed

key to function.

Form Feed

only works in PCL mode, not in PostScript mode. See

“PCL Menu

Options” (page 3-18)

for more information.

Displays the Main Menu and the first submenu:

Language

.

In any submenu, press

Menu

to take you to the top of the Main Menu. See

“Main

Menu System” (page 3-12)

for a full description.

The printer must be offline for

Menu

to function.

3-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

C o n t r o l P a n e l F e a t u r e s

Figure 3.5

Control Panel keys and their functions

(continued)

Key

Esc

Description

Enter

Up

Down

In the menu system, exits the current menu level and returns to the previous one.

Press

Esc

at any time in the menu system to take you to the previous level. No changes to values will be saved unless you first press

Enter

Press

Esc

while at Reset Menu or the top level of Main Menu to exit either menu.

In the menu system, accesses, sets, or invokes the displayed submenu, value, or function:

• When a submenu is displayed, press

Enter

• When a printer setting is displayed, press

Enter

default value. to access a submenu.

to set the current value as the

• In PCL, press

Enter

to override a paper mismatch.

• When a printer action is displayed, such as any of the Test Menu (page 3-61) or Reset

Menu (page 3-65) functions, press

Enter

to invoke the action.

Out of the menu system, acts as a Continue key:

• After certain error conditions when

Auto Continue

is

Off

, press

Enter

the printing process. See

Auto Continue

(page 3-59) for more information.

to continue

In the menu system, scrolls backward (up) through submenus or through the current list of values or functions.

For numeric values such as number of

Copies

, press

Up

to increase the number.

Scrolling wraps—if the first item in a list is displayed, press

Up

in the list.

to display the last item

Press

Up

for more than two seconds to scroll continuously. During scrolling, there may be a greater increment for each step than that for single presses. For example, for the

PCL Menu setting

Pitch

(page 3-20), the single press increment is 0.01 whereas the scrolling increment is 1.00.

In the menu system, scrolls forward (down) through the submenus or through the current list of values or actions.

For numeric values such as number of

Copies

, press

Down

Scrolling wraps—if the last item in a list is displayed, press

Down

item in the list.

to decrease the number. to display the first

Press

Down

for more than two seconds to scroll continuously. During scrolling, there may be a greater increment for each step than that for single presses. For example, for the

PCL Menu setting

Pitch

(page 3-20), the single press increment is 0.01 whereas the scrolling increment is 1.00.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-7

AUG-CH03 Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m

Navigating the

Menu System

The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps Control Panel contains

two

menu structures:

Main Menu

and its submenus:

— Language

— PCL Menu

PostScript Menu

(when the PostScript option is installed)

— Interface Menu

— System Menu

— Test Menu

The Main Menu system is accessed by pressing

Menu

Each of the submenus may have other submenus, settings, or functions. See

“Main Menu

System” (page 3-12)

for more information.

Reset Menu

and its functions:

— Reset Printer

— Reset Menus

Reset I/f Cards

(available only in firmware release 4.0 and when a network option is installed)

— Reset All

Cancel PS Job

(when the PostScript option is installed)

The

Reset Menu

is accessed by pressing

Reset

There are no submenus. See

“Reset Menu” (page 3-65)

.

Take the printer

offline

(page 3-6) to access the

Main Menu

or the

Reset Menu

.

Note

3-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m

Menu System

Indicators

As shown in Figure 3.6, three symbols called

indicators

may appear on menu displays.

Figure 3.6

Menu indicator symbols on the Control Panel display

Symbol Description

>

=

*

Indicates another

menu

level below this one.

Main Menu

Language

Indicates that a value or setting follows the

option

on the bottom line.

After a

setting

, indicates it is the current value.

Language

Français

Language

English

Example

>

=

=

*

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-9

AUG-CH03 Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m

Setting a

Menu Option

To set a

Main Menu

option or to invoke a

Test Menu

or

Reset

Menu

function, follow the steps below:

1

Press Online

You will see:

Offline _/_

Press a key...

to take the printer offline.

2

Press Menu

Reset to access the Main Menu or press to access the Reset Menu.

3

Press Down or Up to scroll through the list of submenus, options, or functions.

4

When you see the submenu, option, or function you want, press Enter

If you selected a submenu or option you did not want, press

Esc

to return to the previous level; then make the selection you want and press accept it.

Enter

to

5

If necessary, repeat Step 3 and Step 4 to go through submenu levels to reach all desired options or functions.

If many possibilities exist, such as 1 through 99 for number of

Copies

, you can scroll quickly by holding down the key.

After pressing

Enter

to accept a setting, you will briefly see on the top line of the display:

* saved *

This indicates the value has been saved as the current setting.

3-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

N a v i g a t i n g t h e M e n u S y s t e m

6

You may either continue to work in the menu system by repeating the steps above, or exit and return to normal operation by pressing Online

Note

If you press

Online

not be saved.

before

Enter

the value will

Other ways to exit a menu option or the menu system completely are as follows:

• In the

Main Menu

, press

Menu

the top of the

Main Menu

.

to return to

• Press

Esc

from

Main Menu

or

Reset Menu

to exit the menu system and display the following message:

Offline _/_

Press a key...

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-11

AUG-CH03 Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

M a i n M e n u S y s t e m

Main Menu

System

The

Main Menu

system is hierarchical, based on a cascading system of submenus, each containing other submenus or options designed to configure the printer for your environment. The

Main Menu hierarchy

is depicted in

Figure 3.7 (page 3-13)

.

Note

In this chapter, factory settings are shown

boldfaced

and followed by an asterisk (

*

). See Chapter 1: Introduction

(page 1-4)

for a definition of factory setting.

When you change a factory setting or an existing setting to a new value, the new value becomes the

current

setting.

On the printer, the current setting always appears

first

in the list of values and is followed by an asterisk (*). The other possible values are located by pressing

Up

or

Down

to scroll through the list.

See “Reset Menu” (page 3-65) for information on how to revert to factory settings.

3-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

Figure 3.7

Main Menu hierarchy

Menu

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

Deutsch

English

Español

Français

Français canad.

Italiano

Português (BRA)

See Figure 3.9 (page 3-16).

See Figure 3.11 (page 3-31).

See Figure 3.13 (page 3-38).

See Figure 3.19 (page 3-57).

See Figure 3.21 (page 3-61).

M a i n M e n u S y s t e m

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-13

AUG-CH03 Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

L a n g u a g e

Language

Language

Options

Language

includes a list of international languages used to display messages on the Control Panel and used to print text on the Configuration Sheet (page 3-62).

Figure 3.8 shows the

Language

options and their English equivalent. See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change the language option.

The

Language

option is not changed by the

Reset Menus

function (page 3-66).

Note

Figure 3.8

Language options

Options

Deutsch

English

Español

Français

Français canad.

Italiano

Português (BRA)

English Equivalent

German

International English

Spanish

French

French Canadian

Italian

Brazilian Portuguese

3-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 15 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

PCL Menu

PCL Menu

Hierarchy

PCL Menu

options establish the

default

configuration for the printer. PCL (Printer Control Language) is used by software applications to send information and instructions to the printer.

The

PCL Menu hierarchy

is depicted in

Figure 3.9

(page 3-16)

.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-15

AUG-CH03 Page 16 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.9

PCL Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Menu

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Copies

Font Source

Font Number

Pitch

Point Size

Default Source

1* - 99

Internal*

Upper

Lower

Soft

0* - 999

.44 - 99.99 by .01

(10.00*)

4.00 - 999.75 by .25

(12.00*)

Standard*

Manual (MP)

Lower

Standard

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Source Mapping

Appears only when the default font is scalable.

Appears only when font cards are installed or downloaded fonts are available.

Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.

3-16

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Standard

MP Tray

Standard-MP

MP-Standard

Lower

Standard-Lower

Lower-Standard

Lower-MP

Std-Low-MP

Low-Std-MP

MP-Lower

MP-Std-Low

MP-Low-Std

AUG-CH03 Page 17 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.9

PCL Menu hierarchy

(continued)

Paper Size

MP Tray Size

Orientation

Form Length

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)*

(USA)

A4 (210x297)*

(Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

Monarch

DL

C5

Portrait*

Landscape

005 - 128

64* (Europe)

60* (USA)

Symbol Set

Page Protection

Note: The default for Jam Recovery is

On for firmware release 4.0. The default is Off (as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a

Configuration Sheet.

Jam Recovery

Resolution

TrueRes

State Saving

Off*

A4 (210x297)

Legal (8.5x14)

Letter (8.5x11)

Off*

On

300x300

600x600*

Off

On*

Off*

On

Desktop

ISO L1

ISO L2

ISO L5

ISO-4 UK

ISO-6 ASCII

ISO-11 Swedish

ISO-15 Italian

ISO-17 Spanish

ISO-21 German

ISO-60 Norw. v1

ISO-69 French

Legal

Math-8

Microsoft Publ.

PC-8

PC-8 DN

PC-8 Tk

PC-850

PC-852

Pi Font

PS Math

PS Text

Roman-8*

Ventura Int’l.

Ventura Math

Ventura US

Win 3.0

Win L1

Win L2

Win L5

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-17

AUG-CH03 Page 18 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

PCL Menu

Options

PCL Menu

options and their settings are described in

Figure 3.10 (page 3-19)

. Factory settings are

boldfaced

, followed by an asterisk (

*

). See

“Setting a Menu Option”

(page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the

Document Services for Printing Guide

to use the RUI to change settings.

Settings for certain

PCL Menu

options may be overridden from many software applications. If your software application specifies a value for any option below, the printer

PCL Menu

setting will be ignored:

• Copies

• Font Source

• Font Number

• Pitch

• Point Size

• Default Source

• Paper Size

• Orientation

• Form Length

• Symbol Set

Note

The Xerox printer driver allows your software application to specify three additional PCL Menu options:

Page Protection

Resolution

TrueRes

3-18

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 19 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Copies

Font Source

1*

- 99

Setting

Internal*

Upper

Lower

Soft

Description

Number of times each page is printed.

Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

Location of the default font in PCL.

Internal

refers to the font set residing in the printer’s permanent memory. These fonts are resident in the printer and cannot be altered.

Upper

and

Lower

refer to the two font card slots and appear

only

when a font card is installed in a slot. See

Chapter 1: Introduction

(

page 1-3

) for location of the font card slots.

When a font card contains its own default font, the current

Font Source

is overridden. You must change the

Font Source

manually if you do not want to use the default font on the font card.

Soft

refers to fonts permanently downloaded to printer memory.

Soft

appears

only

if there is a permanently downloaded font.

Upper

and

Lower

appear only when a font card is installed.

Soft

appears when there is a downloaded font.

Note

The

Font Source

setting returns to its factory setting (“Internal”) if

Symbol Set

(page 3-25) is changed.

If the

Font Source

setting specifies a location other than “Internal”,

Font

Number

(page 3-20) reverts to 0 automatically.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-19

AUG-CH03 Page 20 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Font Number 0*

- 999

Setting Description

Default font in PCL.

Only

Font Number

values valid for the

Font Source

location (page 3-19) are displayed. For example, if you have

internal

fonts only, the maximum

Font Number

is 50.

Font Number

values are printed on the

PCL Font

List

(page 3-63) in the first column. Print a

PCL Font

List

to find the correct number to use with this setting.

Note

The

Font Number

setting returns to its factory setting (0) if the

Symbol Set

(page 3-25) default is changed.

If the

Font Source

setting (page 3-19) specifies a location other than

“Internal”,

Font Number

reverts to 0 automatically.

Pitch

.44 - 99.99 by .01

(

10.00*

)

Number of characters per inch (cpi) for the font represented by

Font Number

(page 3-20).

Appears only when the

Font Number

setting specifies a scalable fixed pitch font, such as Courier.

Up

99.99 cpi. increments pitch at .01 cpi, from .44 to

Down

decrements at .01 cpi.

Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

3-20

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 21 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Point Size

Default Source

Setting

4.00 - 999.75 by .25

(

12.00*

)

Standard*

Manual (MP)

Lower

Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.

Description

Point size (a measurement for type height, 1 point equals 0.351 mm or approximately 1/72 inch) for the font represented by

Font Number

(page 3-20).

Appears only when the

Font Number

setting specifies a scalable proportional spaced font, such as

Times New Roman.

Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

Default paper source in PCL if none is specified by your software application.

The printer uses

Default Source

when there is no paper source specified in the print job. Some software applications have a paper source selection called

“Auto Select” or “Auto Sheet Feed” which usually results in the omission of a paper source selection in a print job.

When the printer uses

Default Source, Source

Mapping

(page 3-22) is used to determine the actual tray or slot from which the printer pulls paper. See

Chapter 2: Handling Paper

,

“Selecting a Paper

Source” (page 2-22)

for more information on the interaction of

Default Source

and

Source Mapping

.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-21

AUG-CH03 Page 22 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option Setting Description

Source Mapping

Options (Paper Sources):

Standard

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Standard

MP Tray

Standard-MP

MP-Standard

Lower

Standard-Lower

Lower-Standard

Lower-MP

Std-Low-MP

Low-Std-MP

MP-Lower

MP-Std-Low

MP-Low-Std

Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.

Source mapping

enables you to control

from your software application

the location from which the printer pulls paper.

Each of the six paper sources that can be requested through your application maps to one of the

Source

Mapping

settings.

Standard

is the factory setting for the Standard,

Lower, and Large Capacity paper sources.

MP Tray

is the factory setting for Manual, Manual Envelope, and

Envelope Feeder. See

Figure 2.12 (page 2-26)

for factory settings with and without a lower base installed.

When a paper source (e.g., Standard) is mapped to a

sequence

of trays (e.g.,

Standard-MP

), the printer may switch between them for two purposes:

1) To increase paper capacity.

When the current tray becomes empty, the printer automatically switches to the next tray in the sequence, provided the paper size is the same.

2) To search for the correct paper size to print a page.

If the paper size specified in your software application does not match what is loaded in the current tray, the printer automatically searches the next tray in the sequence for a paper size that matches.

For more information on taking full advantage of

Source Mapping

and for detailed examples of usage, see

“Selecting a Paper Source” (page 2-22)

.

3-22

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 23 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Paper Size

Setting Description

MP Tray Size

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)*

(USA)

A4 (210x297)*

(Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

Monarch

DL

C5

See

Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)

for more paper dimensions.

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)*

(USA)

A4 (210x297)*

(Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

Monarch

DL

C5

Paper size used to print a page if no paper size is specified by your software application.

The Xerox printer driver supports all

Paper Size

settings. However, without the Xerox printer driver installed, not all paper sizes may be supported by your software application.

The

Defaults

setting (page 3-60) in the System Menu determines whether the factory setting for

Paper

Size

is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11)”.

MP Tray Size

through the MP tray. The MP tray does not have a size sensor; therefore, you must explicitly tell the printer what MP tray paper size to expect. The printer compares the paper size communicated in the print job to the

MP Tray Size

printer displays a message informing you what paper size to feed through the MP tray.

The

Defaults

Size

communicates the paper size feeding

setting. If different, the

setting (page 3-60) in the System Menu determines whether the factory setting for

MP Tray

is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11)”.

Orientation

See

Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)

for more paper dimensions.

Portrait*

Landscape

Page orientation.

Portrait

refers to a vertical page;

Landscape

refers to a horizontal page.

Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-23

AUG-CH03 Page 24 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Form Length

Setting Description

005 - 128

64*

(Europe)

60*

(USA)

Number of lines per page used in PCL.

The

Form Length

setting is automatically adjusted when the

Paper Size

(page 3-23) default is changed.

For example, if you set

Paper Size

to “A4 (210x297)”

Form Length

is adjusted to 64 automatically. If

Paper

Size

is set to “Letter (8.5X11),”

Form Length

is adjusted to 60.

Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

The

Defaults

(page 3-60) in the System Menu determines whether the

Form Length

factory setting is 64 or 60.

3-24

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 25 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Symbol Set

Setting Description

Desktop

ISO L1

ISO L2

ISO L5

ISO-4 UK

ISO-6 ASCII

ISO-11 Swedish

ISO-15 Italian

ISO-17 Spanish

ISO-21 German

ISO-60 Norw. V1

ISO-69 French

Legal

Math-8

Microsoft Publ.

PC-8

PC-8 DN

PC-8 Tk

PC-850

PC-852

Pi Font

PS Math

PS Text

Roman-8*

Ventura Int’l.

Ventura Math

Ventura US

Win 3.0

Win L1

Win L2

Win L5

Collection of characters available for a font, including uppercase and lowercase alphabets, punctuation marks, and special characters such as open and close quotation marks or international characters.

Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

Note

When you change

Symbol Set

, the settings for

Font Number

(page 3-20) and

Font Source

(page 3-19) are reset to their factory settings automatically.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-25

AUG-CH03 Page 26 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option Setting Description

Page Protection

Jam Recovery

Note: The default for Jam

Recovery is

On

for firmware release 4.0. The default is

Off

(as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

Off*

A4 (210x297)

Legal (8.5x14)

Letter (8.5x11)

See

Figure 2.3 (page 2-6)

for more paper dimensions.

Use to reserve memory for a full page of the selected paper size.

When

Off

, memory is not reserved for an entire page.

It then becomes possible for a page to be too complex to compose. The result is a

Page Too Complex error message and the page may be printed on more than one sheet of paper.

When set to a paper size, each page is composed into reserved memory before the paper starts to move through the printer. The printer may slow down slightly with

Page Protection

; however, you will be assured of printing a complex page on one sheet of paper.

Page Protection

can be overridden by software when the Xerox printer driver is installed.

See

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)

for further information.

Off*

On

Determines how the printer recovers from a paper jam. It is set independently for PCL and PostScript.

When

On

, the printer reprints any pages in the printer at the time of the jam, after the jam has been cleared.

The printer does this by using a portion of memory to store data. This setting can reduce printer speed with minimum memory installed. Printer speed can be increased by installing additional memory and/or using the default setting of

Off

.

When

Off

, some pages may be lost after the jam has been cleared. The print job must be resent, specifying those pages that did not print as a result of the paper jam.

See

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)

for further information.

3-26

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 27 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Resolution

TrueRes

Off

On*

Setting

300x300

600x600*

Description

Dots per inch (dpi).

Some software applications override this setting. If your software application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

Resolution

can be overridden by software when the

Xerox printer driver is installed.

Higher resolutions use more printer memory. See

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)

for further information.

When

On

, smooths the curves in characters and graphics to reduce coarseness, thereby improving image quality.

TrueRes

can be overridden by software when the

Xerox printer driver is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-27

AUG-CH03 Page 28 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P C L M e n u

Figure 3.10 PCL Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

State Saving Off*

On

Setting Description

Reserves memory for saving permanently downloaded fonts and macros, when the printer switches from using the PCL printer language to using the PostScript printer language, or when the printer steps down in

Page Protection

or

Resolution

.

When

Off

, all permanently downloaded fonts and macros are cleared from memory when switching

PDLs. They must be downloaded again when the printer switches back to PCL from PostScript.

When

On

, permanently downloaded fonts and macros are stored in printer memory. You eliminate the time to download them again when the printer switches back to PCL.

Note

Temporary fonts and macros are always cleared at the end of every print job.

State Saving

requires 10 MB (MegaBytes) of memory if the PostScript option is installed. If the PostScript option is not installed,

State Saving

may be selected with less than 10 MB. This will prevent loss of downloaded PCL fonts and macros if applications change the setting of

Resolution

or

Page

Protection

. Enabling

State Saving

can have an effect on printing speed with minimum memory installed. It is recommended that this option not be enabled without 10 MB of printer memory.

3-28

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 29 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

PostScript

Menu

PostScript Menu

options establish the default PostScript configuration for the printer. PostScript may be used by software applications to send information and instructions to the printer.

Note

The 4505ps and 4510ps printers are factory-equipped with

PostScript.

PostScript is available as an option for the 4505 and 4510 printers. See Appendix D: Ordering Information.

Note

PostScript Users:

The Xerox Windows PostScript driver allows you to either download the PostScript header with every job, or download it only once. If the printer is used in a network or other shared environment, where both PCL and PostScript jobs are printed, the header will be deleted whenever the printer switches from PostScript to PCL. Banner sheets printed from Novell networks cause the printer to switch between PostScript and

PCL. If Banner Sheets are printed, insure that the printer’s

Language Sensing

option is

On

. To avoid the loss of the

PostScript header, select “Download Each Job” in the

PostScript driver. The “Already Downloaded” option may be selected in the driver if at least 10 MB of memory is installed in the printer and the printer’s

State Saving

option is set to

On

in the printer’s

PostScript menu

. You must download the header at least once for each power on cycle. If several different PostScript applications are used, the “Download

Each Job” option will guarantee that the correct header is always available.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-29

AUG-CH03 Page 30 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

PostScript Menu

Hierarchy

Figure 3.11 (page 3-31)

shows the

PostScript Menu hierarchy

,

which appears only when the PostScript option is installed

.

3-30

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 31 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.11 PostScript Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Menu

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Copies

Default Tray

1* - 99

Standard*

Lower

Manual

Note: The default for

Tray Switching is

Standard-MP or

Low-Std-MP for firmware release 4.0.

The default is Off (as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a

Configuration Sheet.

Tray Switching

Manual Size

Note: The default for

Jam Recovery is On for firmware release 4.0.

The default is Off (as shown at right) for releases > 4.0.

Print Errors

Jam Recovery

Resolution

TrueRes

State Saving

Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)*

(USA)

A4 (210x297)*

(Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

Monarch

DL

C5

Off*

On

Off*

On

300x300

600x600*

Off

On*

Off*

On

Off*

Standard-MP

MP-Standard

Standard-Lower

Lower-Standard

Lower-MP

Std-Low-MP

Low-Std-MP

MP-Lower

MP-Std-Low

MP-Low-Std

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-31

AUG-CH03 Page 32 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

PostScript Menu

Options

PostScript Menu

options and their settings are described in

Figure 3.12. Factory settings are

boldfaced

, followed by an asterisk (

*

). See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the

Document

Services for Printing Guide

to use the RUI to change settings.

Default settings for certain

PostScript Menu

options may be overridden from many software applications. If your software application specifies a value for an option below, the

PostScript Menu setting

will be ignored:

• Copies

• Default Tray

• Manual Size

• Tray Switching

Note

The Xerox printer driver allows your software application to specify additional PostScript Menu options:

Resolution

TrueRes

Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings

Option Setting Description

Copies

Default Tray

1*

- 99

Standard*

Lower

Manual

Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.

Number of times each page is printed.

Most software applications override this setting. If your application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

Paper tray used if none is specified in your software application.

3-32

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 33 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option Setting Description

Tray Switching

Note: The default for Tray

Switching is

Standard-MP

or

Low-Std-MP

for firmware release 4.0. The default is

Off

(as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

Off*

Standard-MP

MP-Standard

Standard-Lower

Lower-Standard

Lower-MP

Std-Low-MP

Low-Std-MP†

MP-Lower

MP-Std-Low

MP-Low-Std

Sequence of trays the printer uses when printing a page of a PostScript print job.

If the tray requested for the page is included in this sequence, then the whole sequence is used instead of the requested tray. The first tray used is the one in the sequence, going from left to right, that satisfies all page requirements. If the requested tray is not included in this sequence, then the requested tray alone is used. For example, if this setting is

“Lower-Standard” and the standard tray (upper) is requested, then the lower tray will be used first provided that it contains the requested size of paper.

When this sequence is being used and the current tray runs out of paper, then the next tray in the sequence that has the same size paper will be used.

Settings that include the lower tray only appear in the menu when an optional lower base is installed.

Settings that begin with MP allow for printing of the first pages of a job on special stock by placing the required number of sheets of the special stock in the

MP tray.

The factory default is Low-Std-MP when a lower tray is installed, or Standard-MP when a lower tray is not installed.

Appears only when an optional lower base is installed.

!

Caution

Do not remove either the standard or lower tray when the printer is feeding paper.

PostScript drivers other than the Xerox driver may simply enable or disable

Tray Switching

; they can not specify a setting.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-33

AUG-CH03 Page 34 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Manual Size

Setting Description

Print Errors

Legal (8.5x14)

Folio (8.5x13)

Letter (8.5x11)*

A4 (210x297)*

(USA)

(Europe)

Exec (7.25x10.5)

B5 (176x250)

A5 (148.5x210)

Com-10

Monarch

DL

C5

Off*

On

Paper size to expect in the manual slot if none is specified in your software application.

Manual Size

communicates the paper size feeding through the MP tray. The MP tray does not have a size sensor; therefore, you must explicitly tell the printer what MP tray paper size to expect. The printer compares the paper size communicated in the print job to the

Manual Size

setting. If different, the printer displays a message informing you what paper size to feed through the MP tray.

The

Defaults

option (page 3-60) in the System Menu determines whether the factory setting for

Manual

Size

is “A4 (210x297)” or “Letter (8.5x11).”

The Xerox Windows PostScript driver allows you to select either “MP Tray” or Manual Feed” to designate the printer’s MP tray as the paper source. If “MP Tray” is selected from the driver, the setting of

Manual Size

on the printer Control Panel must match the paper size requested in the driver. If

Manual Size

and the selection of the paper size in the driver do not match, the page may be formatted incorrectly. You can change the setting of

Manual Size

in the PostScript

Menu after the Control Panel prompts you to load the appropriate paper in the MP tray. The setting of

Manual Size

on the Control Panel only affects paper fed from the MP tray. This setting is ignored for paper fed from the standard or lower trays.

Control of PostScript’s built-in error handler

(debugger).

Should the printer encounter a PostScript error while printing a job, PostScript prints an error sheet when

Print Errors

is

On

. This is useful on a network, as an error sheet will alert the user that the print job had errors and was flushed.

3-34

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 35 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Jam Recovery

Note: The default for Jam

Recovery is

On

for firmware release 4.0. The default is

Off

(as shown at right) for releases > 4.0. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

Resolution

TrueRes

Off*

On

Off

On*

Setting

300x300

600x600*

Description

Determines how the printer recovers from a paper jam. It is set independently for PCL and PostScript.

When

On

, the printer reprints any pages in the printer at the time of the jam, after the jam has been cleared.

The printer does this by using a portion of memory to store data. This setting can reduce printer speed with minimum memory installed. Printer speed can be increased by installing additional memory and/or using the default setting of

Off

.

When

Off

, some pages may be lost after the jam has been cleared. The print job must be resent, specifying those pages that did not print as a result of the paper jam.

See

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)

for further information.

Dots per inch (dpi).

Some software applications override this setting. If your software application does not, the printer assumes the default setting here.

Resolution

can be overridden by software when the

Xerox printer driver is installed.

Higher resolutions require more printer memory. See

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)

for further information.

When

On

, smooths the curves in characters and graphics to reduce coarseness, thereby improving image quality.

TrueRes

can be overridden by software when the

Xerox printer driver is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-35

AUG-CH03 Page 36 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P o s t S c r i p t M e n u

Figure 3.12 PostScript Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

State Saving Off*

On

Setting Description

Reserves memory for saving the contents of virtual memory, when print jobs switch from PostScript to the PCL printer language or when the printer steps down in

Page Protection

or

Resolution

.

When

Off

, if print jobs switch from PostScript to PCL, the contents of virtual memory are cleared.

When

On

,

State Saving

saves virtual memory contents, eliminating the time to download again when switching back to PostScript.

State Saving

requires 10 MB (MegaBytes) of memory if the PostScript option is installed. If the PostScript option is not installed,

State Saving

may be selected with less than 10 MB. This will prevent loss of downloaded PCL fonts and macros if applications change the setting of

Resolution

or

Page

Protection

. Enabling

State Saving

can have an effect on printing speed with minimum memory installed. It is recommended that this option not be enabled without 10 MB of printer memory.

Note

The contents of virtual memory will not be saved if there is not enough free memory.

In Microsoft Windows, the PostScript printer driver has an option for determining whether header information

(general instructions PostScript needs before processing a print job) is sent with every print job or just once at the start of a PostScript session. The header is stored in virtual memory. If you set the header option to send it to the printer once, turning

State Saving

operation.

On

means the header will not need to be sent again upon return to PostScript

3-36

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 37 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Interface

Menu

Interface Menu

Hierarchy

The

Interface Menu

contains submenus for the

parallel

and

serial

ports on the printer as well as submenus for

network interface

ports

when a network option(s) is installed

.

The

Interface Menu

may include submenus for the following:

Parallel Menu

(See page 3-41.)

Serial Menu

(See page 3-45.)

LocalTalk Menu

(See page 3-50.)

Ethernet Menu

(See page 3-51.)

Token Ring Menu

(See page 3-54.)

Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)

shows the

Interface Menu hierarchy

.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-37

AUG-CH03 Page 38 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Menu

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Parallel Menu

Port Enable

Port Timeout

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Bidirectional

Transfer Rate

Off

On*

Off*

On

High

Low*

Off

On*

5 - 999 secs (30*)

PCL*

PostScript

Off

On*

† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

3-38

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 39 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

(continued)

Port Enable Off

On*

Serial Menu

Port Timeout 5 - 999 secs (30*)

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Port Type

Baud Rate

PCL*

PostScript

Off

On*

Off

On*

RS232*

RS422

57600

38400

19200

9600*

4800

2400

1200

600

300

Handshake

DTR Polarity

Data Bits

Parity

Stop Bits

Robust XON*

XON

Hardware

High*

Low

7

8*

None*

Even

Odd

2

1.5

1*

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-39

AUG-CH03 Page 40 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.13 Interface Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

(continued)

Note: The Frame Type option (as shown at right) is available for firmware release 4.0

only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a

Configuration Sheet.

LocalTalk Menu

Ethernet Menu

Port Timeout

Port Timeout

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Frame Type

Token Ring Menu

Port Timeout

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

5 - 999 secs (30*)

5 - 999 secs (30*)

PCL*

PostScript

Off

On*

Off

On*

802.3*

Ethernet II

5 - 999 secs (30*)

PCL*

PostScript

Off

On*

Off

On*

† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

‡ Appears only when the option is installed.

3-40

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 41 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Parallel Menu

Options

The

Parallel Menu

, a submenu of the

Interface Menu

,

Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)

, contains options for configuring the printer’s bidirectional parallel port.

Figure 3.14 describes each

Parallel Menu

option. Factory settings are

boldfaced

and followed by an asterisk (

*

). See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the

Document Services for

Printing Guide

to use the RUI to change settings.

Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Port Enable

Port Timeout

System Language

Off

On*

Setting

5-999 secs (

30*

)

PCL*

PostScript

Appears only when the

PostScript option is installed.

Description

Activation of the parallel port.

When

On

, the parallel port is enabled so that the printer can receive print jobs through it.

The parallel port becomes part of a port polling sequence that includes all enabled ports. See

Appendix C: I/O Port Polling

for information.

When

Off

, the port is disabled so no communication occurs through this port with the host. If you are not using the parallel port, you can set

Port Enable

Off

.

Time interval for determining when to end an incomplete print job and poll the next port in the polling sequence.

Port Timeout

works in conjunction with

Auto Job

End

(page 3-43).

See

Appendix C: I/O Port Polling

for more information.

Page description language (PDL) the printer will use for print jobs coming through the parallel port.

When

Lang. Sensing

(page 3-42) is

On

,

System

Language

is used only when the printer cannot detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-41

AUG-CH03 Page 42 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Lang. Sensing

Off

On*

Setting Description

Automatic recognition of the page description language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.

When

On

, if the parallel port receives print jobs of different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which

PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the incoming data stream, then switching to the perceived language for that job or to the

System

Language

setting if it fails to sense the language.

When

On

, if

State Saving

(page 3-28) in the PCL

Menu or

State Saving

(page 3-36) in the PostScript

Menu is also

On

, the permanently downloaded fonts and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time to download them again when switching between

PDLs occurs.

3-42

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 43 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Auto Job End

Off

On*

Setting Description

Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.

When

On

, after the current print job has paused long enough to exceed the

Port Timeout

(page 3-41) interval and no data has been received on any other port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared from memory.

Use

Auto Job End

On

when the printer serves multiple users on a network. This assures that one user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the printer whether or not another user sends a print job.

No partial pages will be left unprinted.

When

Off

, the print job does not end after the timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue until another print job is received on any port. A partial page will remain unprinted until the next print job is received. See

Form Feed

information on ejecting partial pages.

(page 3-6) for

Note

Auto Job End

should be

On

if the printer is on a network.

If you are not sharing the printer with other users and if you find that one page is split and printed on multiple pages, set

Auto Job End

Off

or increase the

Port Timeout

interval. It could be the

Port Timeout

is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.

Also see

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-67)

for other ways to correct the problem of one page printing on multiple pages.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-43

AUG-CH03 Page 44 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.14 Parallel Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Bidirectional Off*

On

Setting Description

Activation of two-way communications between the printer and your computer.

Bidirectional

On

enables the printer to send messages to your computer.

!

Caution

Only set Bidirectional

On

if you have a software application that supports it.

Transfer Rate

High

Low*

Relative speed of the port.

The

High

setting will free up the host more quickly for other processing. If your computer cannot handle the high speed, data may be lost.

3-44

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 45 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Serial Menu

Options

The

Serial Menu

, a submenu of the

Interface Menu,

Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)

, contains options for configuring the printer’s serial port.

Figure 3.15 describes each

Serial Menu

option. Factory settings are

boldfaced

and followed by an asterisk (

*

). See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the

Document Services for

Printing Guide

to use the RUI to change settings.

Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Port Enable

Port Timeout

System Language

Off

On*

Setting

5-999 secs (

30*

)

PCL*

PostScript

Appears only when the

PostScript option is installed.

Description

Activation of the serial port.

When

On

, the serial port is enabled so that the printer can receive print jobs through it.

The serial port becomes part of a port polling sequence that includes all enabled ports. See

Appendix C: I/O Port Polling

for information.

When

Off

, the port is disabled so no communication occurs through this port with the host. If you are not using the serial port, you can set

Port Enable

Off

.

Time interval for determining when to end an incomplete print job and poll the next port in the polling sequence.

Port Timeout

works in conjunction with

Auto Job

End

(page 3-47).

See

Appendix C: I/O Port Polling

for more information.

Page description language (PDL) the printer will use for print jobs coming through the serial port.

When

Lang. Sensing

(page 3-46) is

On

,

System

Language

is used only when the printer cannot detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-45

AUG-CH03 Page 46 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Lang. Sensing

Off

On*

Setting Description

Automatic recognition of the page description language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.

When

On

, if the serial port receives print jobs of different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which

PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the incoming data stream, then switching to the perceived language for that job or to the

System

Language

setting if it fails to sense the language.

When

On

, if

State Saving

(page 3-28) in the PCL

Menu or

State Saving

(page 3-36) in the PostScript

Menu is also

On

, the permanently downloaded fonts and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time to download them again when switching between

PDLs occurs.

3-46

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 47 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Auto Job End

Off

On*

Setting Description

Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.

When

On

, after the current print job has paused long enough to exceed the

Port Timeout

(page 3-45) interval and no data has been received on any other port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared from memory.

Use

Auto Job End

On

when the printer serves multiple users on a network. This assures that one user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the printer whether or not another user sends a print job.

No partial pages will be left unprinted.

When

Off

, the print job does not end after the timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue until another print job is received on any port. A partial page will remain unprinted until the next print job is received. See

Form Feed

information on ejecting partial pages.

(page 3-6) for

Port Type RS232*

RS422

Note

Auto Job End

should be

On

if the printer is on a network.

If you are not sharing the printer with other users and if you find that one page is split and printed on multiple pages, set

Auto Job End

Off

or increase the

Port Timeout

interval. It could be the

Port Timeout

is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.

Also see

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-67)

for other ways to correct the problem of one page printing on multiple pages.

Serial interface standard.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-47

AUG-CH03 Page 48 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Baud Rate

Setting Description

57600

38400

19200

9600*

4800

2400

1200

600

300

Speed at which data is transferred.

Baud rate

translates approximately to

bits per second

.

Note

The serial port

Baud Rate

setting must match the host computer baud rate setting.

Your software application may set the baud rate. If not, use the DOS MODE command to modify the baud rate on the host computer. Refer to your DOS documentation for more information.

Handshake

DTR Polarity

Robust XON*

XON

Hardware

High*

Low

Data flow control. (Flow control, also known as handshaking, is the cooperation between the host computer and printer for data transfer. XON signals the host computer to send more data. XOFF is the converse signal that tells the host computer to stop and wait.)

Robust XON

sends the XON signal continuously.

Robust XON

helps ensure that handshaking works with a host computer that fails to receive the XON signal.

XON

sends the signal only once.

Hardware

is used when the host computer cannot operate in XON/XOFF handshaking mode.

Hardware

requires a cable with the DTR (Data Terminal

Ready) pin connection enabled

.

Serial port’s DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal sent from the printer to notify the host computer that it is ready to receive data.

High

is standard for most computers; it uses true logic

(+5 V).

Low

is typically used on nonstandard equipment; it uses inverted logic (0 V).

3-48

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 49 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.15 Serial Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Data Bits

7

8*

Setting Description

Number of data bits in a character.

The

Data Bits

setting must match the host computer data bits setting.

Note

Parity None*

Even

Odd

Stop Bits

2

1.5

1*

How the parity bit is used in error checking.

The parity bit may be checked against the received character by means of an

Even

or

Odd

error checking mechanism.

Note

The

Parity

setting must match the host computer parity setting.

Number of stop bits in each character. (Stop bits signal the end of a character.)

Note

The

Stop Bits

setting must match the host computer stop bits setting.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-49

AUG-CH03 Page 50 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

LocalTalk Menu

Option

The

LocalTalk Menu

, a submenu of the

Interface Menu,

Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)

, contains a single option for configuring the printer’s LocalTalk port,

when the LocalTalk option has been installed

.

The LocalTalk option supports AppleTalk protocols. For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to

Networking: LocalTalk

packaged with the LocalTalk option.

Figure 3.16 describes the option. The factory setting is

boldfaced

and followed by an asterisk (

*

). See

“Setting a

Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change the setting.

Figure 3.16 LocalTalk Menu option showing factory setting

Option

Port Timeout

Setting

5-999 secs (

30*

)

Description

Time interval for determining when to poll the next port in the polling sequence, after the LocalTalk port has been inactive for this amount of time.

3-50

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 51 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Ethernet Menu

Options

The

Ethernet Menu

, a submenu of the

Interface Menu,

Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)

, contains options for configuring the printer’s Ethernet port,

when the Ethernet option has been installed

.

The Ethernet option supports the following protocols:

• Novell NetWare, Version 3.11

• TCP/IP

• EtherTalk

• DEC LAT

• Microsoft LAN Manager

For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to

Networking: Ethernet

packaged with the Ethernet option kit.

Figure 3.17 describes each

Ethernet Menu

option. Factory settings are

boldfaced

and followed by an asterisk (

*

). See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the

Document Services for

Printing Guide

to use the RUI to change settings.

Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings

Option Setting Description

Port Timeout

System Language

5-999 secs (

30*

)

PCL*

PostScript

Appears only when the

PostScript option is installed.

Time interval for determining when to end an incomplete print job and poll the next port in the polling sequence.

Port Timeout

works in conjunction with

Auto Job

End

(page 3-53).

See

Appendix C: I/O Port Polling

for more information on how port polling works.

Page description language (PDL) the printer will use for print jobs coming through the Ethernet port.

When

Lang. Sensing

(page 3-52) is

On

,

System

Language

is used only when the printer cannot detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-51

AUG-CH03 Page 52 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Lang. Sensing

Off

On*

Setting Description

Automatic recognition of the page description language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.

When

On

, if the Ethernet port receives print jobs of different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which

PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the incoming data stream, then switching to the perceived language for that job or to the

System

Language

setting if it fails to sense the language.

When

On

, if

State Saving

(page 3-28) in the PCL

Menu or

State Saving

(page 3-36) in the PostScript

Menu is also

On

, the permanently downloaded fonts and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time to download them again when switching between

PDLs occurs.

3-52

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 53 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.17 Ethernet Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Auto Job End

Off

On*

Setting Description

Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.

When

On

, after the current print job has paused long enough to exceed the

Port Timeout

(page 3-51) interval and no data has been received on any other port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared from memory.

Use

Auto Job End

On

when the printer serves multiple users on a network. This assures that one user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the printer whether or not another user sends a print job.

No partial pages will be left unprinted.

When

Off

, the print job does not end after the timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue until another print job is received on any port. A partial page will remain unprinted until the next print job is received. See

Form Feed

information on ejecting partial pages.

(page 3-6) for

Frame Type

Note: This option is available for firmware release 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

802.3*

Ethernet II

Note

Auto Job End

should be

On

if the printer is on a network.

If you are not sharing the printer with other users and if you find that one page is split and printed on multiple pages, set

Auto Job End

Off

or increase the

Port Timeout

interval. It could be the

Port Timeout

is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.

Also see

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-67)

for other ways to correct the problem of one page printing on multiple pages.

Protocol standard frame type.

Refer to your network software documentation for the correct frame type.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-53

AUG-CH03 Page 54 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Token Ring

Menu Options

The

Token Ring Menu

, a submenu of the

Interface Menu,

Figure 3.13 (page 3-38)

, contains options for configuring the printer’s Token Ring port,

when the Token Ring option has been installed

.

The Token Ring option supports the following protocols:

• Novell NetWare, Version 3.11

• Microsoft LAN Manager

For detailed information on the supported protocols, refer to

Networking: Token Ring

packaged with the Token Ring option kit.

Figure 3.18 (page 3-55)

describes each

Token Ring Menu

option. Factory settings are

boldfaced

and followed by an asterisk (

*

). See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change a setting.

3-54

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 55 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.18 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings

Option Setting Description

Port Timeout

System Language

Lang. Sensing

5-999 secs (

30*

)

PCL*

PostScript

Appears only when the

PostScript option is installed.

Off

On*

Time interval for determining when to end an incomplete print job and poll the next port in the polling sequence.

Port Timeout

works in conjunction with

Auto Job

End

(page 3-56).

See

Appendix C: I/O Port Polling

for more information on how port polling works.

Page description language (PDL) the printer will use for print jobs coming through the Token Ring port.

When

Lang. Sensing

(page 3-55) is

On

,

System

Language

is used only when the printer cannot detect the PDL used in the incoming print job.

Automatic recognition of the page description language (PDL) used in an incoming print job.

When

On

, if the Token Ring port receives print jobs of different PDLs—such as a PostScript print job followed by a PCL print job—it can automatically sense which

PDL the print job is using. It does this by sampling the incoming data stream, then switching to the perceived language for that job or to the

System

Language

setting if it fails to sense the language.

When

On

, if

State Saving

(page 3-28) in the PCL

Menu or

State Saving

(page 3-36) in the PostScript

Menu is also

On

, the permanently downloaded fonts and macros are saved in memory, eliminating the time to download them again when switching between

PDLs occurs.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-55

AUG-CH03 Page 56 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

I n t e r f a c e M e n u

Figure 3.18 Token Ring Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Auto Job End

Off

On*

Setting Description

Automatic ending of a print job that does not finish.

When

On

, after the current print job has paused long enough to exceed the

Port Timeout

(page 3-55) interval and no data has been received on any other port, the print job will be stopped. Any partial page is ejected from the printer and the print job is cleared from memory.

Use

Auto Job End

On

when the printer serves multiple users on a network. This assures that one user’s print job will finish and all pages will exit the printer whether or not another user sends a print job.

No partial pages will be left unprinted.

When

Off

, the print job does not end after the timeout interval. Instead, the printer waits to continue until another print job is received on any port. A partial page will remain unprinted until the next print job is received. See

Form Feed

information on ejecting partial pages.

(page 3-6) for

Note

Auto Job End

should be

On

if the printer is on a network.

If you are not sharing the printer with other users and if you find that one page is split and printed on multiple pages, set

Auto Job End

Off

or increase the

Port Timeout

interval. It could be the

Port Timeout

is exceeded before the rest of the page can be sent.

Also see

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory”

(page 3-67)

for other ways to correct the problem of one page printing on multiple pages.

3-56

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 57 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

S y s t e m M e n u

System Menu

The

System Menu

options set general printer features.

System Menu

Hierarchy

Figure 3.19 highlights the

System Menu hierarchy

.

Figure 3.19 System Menu hierarchy showing factory settings

Menu

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Hex Dump

Chime

Note: The System

Messages and Print

Density options (as shown at right) are available for firmware release 4.0 only.

The Power Saver option (as shown at right) is available for firmware releases > 4.0.

To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a

Configuration Sheet.

System Messages

Auto Continue

Print Density

Defaults

Power Saver

Off*

On

Off

Once*

Continuous

Off

On*

Off*

On

0 - 4 (2*)

Europe

USA

15 min.* (4505)

30 min.* (4510)

60 min.

90 min.

† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-57

AUG-CH03 Page 58 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

S y s t e m M e n u

System Menu

Options

In Figure 3.20,

System Menu

options and their settings are described. Factory settings are

boldfaced

, followed by an asterisk (

*

). See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps to find and change a setting, or refer to the

Document

Services for Printing Guide

to use the RUI to change settings.

Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings

Option

Hex Dump Off*

On

Setting Description

Print output as hexadecimal codes instead of normal print data.

When

Off

, data is printed normally.

When

On

,

Hex Dump

is used for error checking and error analysis.

Chime

Off

Once*

Continuous

System Messages

Note: This option is available for firmware release 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

Off

On*

Note

When

Hex Dump

is

On

, the Control Panel menus are not available.

Audible chime signal for attention.

When

Once

, the printer sounds one audible chime when needing attention.

When

Continuous

, the printer sounds frequent audible chimes when needing attention.

When

Off

, no chime sound is produced.

Display of system error messages.

When

On

, system error messages are displayed.

When

Off

, no system messages are displayed.

3-58

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 59 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

S y s t e m M e n u

Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Auto Continue

Print Density

Note: This option is available for firmware release 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

Off*

On

Setting

0 - 4 (

2*

)

Description

Control of the resumption of printing after system errors occur.

Certain errors may occur that halt printer operations.

Two examples are:

Out of Memory

and

Page Too Complex

.

When

Auto Continue

is

Off

, the printer does not automatically resume.

Enter

must

be pressed before normal printer operations can continue.

When

Auto Continue

is

On

, the printer automatically resumes operation after certain system errors if

Enter

is not pressed within ten seconds

. The

On

setting is useful in a networked environment

.

Darkness of the print.

0 is the lightest and 4 is the darkest.

A darker print density uses more toner and may reduce the life of the EP cartridge.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-59

AUG-CH03 Page 60 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

S y s t e m M e n u

Figure 3.20 System Menu options showing factory settings

(continued)

Option

Defaults

Europe

USA

Setting Description

Control of default paper size settings in various menus.

There is no standard factory-set default for this option; the default varies by world region.

When

Europe

, all paper size-related options are set to

A4 (210x297) and

Form Length

is set to 64.

When

USA

, all paper size-related options are set to

Letter (8.5x11) and

Form Length

is set to 60.

The

Config. Sheet

(page 3-62) is printed at

Defaults

size, regardless of actual paper size.

Note

Perform a

Reset Menus

(page 3-66) after changing

Defaults

.

Power Saver

Note: This option is available for firmware releases > 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

15 min.*

(4505)

30 min.*

(4510)

60 min.

90 min.

The Xerox 4505/4510 printers conform to EPA Energy

Star guidelines. The printer will enter a low power state after 15 minutes of inactivity on the 4505 and after 30 minutes of inactivity on the 4510. This timeout is adjustable to 15, 30, 60 or 90 minutes via this option.

When in the low power state, the printer displays

Power Saver Mode on the Control Panel. When a print job is received while in the power saver mode, the printer may require up to 30 seconds of warm up time before the first sheet is fed from the input tray.

3-60

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 61 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

T e s t M e n u

Test Menu

Test Menu

options are functions that provide output to help you maintain high quality printing.

Options in the

Test Menu

are

functions

to be performed by the printer rather than settings. There are no submenus.

Note

Test Menu

Hierarchy

Figure 3.21 shows the

Test Menu

hierarchy.

Note: The Demo Page option (as shown at right) is available for firmware releases > 4.0

only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a

Configuration Sheet.

Figure 3.21 Test Menu hierarchy

Menu

Language

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu

Interface Menu

System Menu

Test Menu

Config. Sheet

Demo Page

PCL Font List

PS Font List

Test Print

Memory Check

Fuser Cleaning

† Appears only when the PostScript option is installed.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-61

AUG-CH03 Page 62 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

T e s t M e n u

Test Menu

Functions

Figure 3.22 describes each

Test Menu

function. See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps in performing a

Test

Menu

function.

Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions

Function

Config. Sheet

Demo Page

Note: This option is available for firmware releases > 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

Description

Configuration Sheet to show the printer’s current information and menu settings.

The Configuration Sheet contains a variety of information such as:

• Number of sheets printed to date.

• Total printer memory (RAM) available.

• Firmware versions for the printer controller.

• Firmware versions for Ethernet, LocalTalk, and Token Ring, when installed.

• PostScript revision level, when installed.

• Current menu settings.

• Information on installed options, including the lower base.

The Configuration Sheet is printed from the

Default Source

(page 3-21) at the current

Resolution

setting (page 3-27), both specified in the PCL Menu, using A4

(210x297) paper if the System Menu setting for

Defaults

(page 3-60) is

Europe

, or using Letter (8.5x11) paper if

Defaults

is

USA

.

Config. Sheet

will cause a printer reset.

Demo Page listing Connectivity, Paper Handling, Print Quality and Page Description

Languages of the printer.

The Demo Page is printed from the

Default Source

(page 3-21), specified in the

PCL Menu, at 600 dpi using A4 (210x297) paper if the System Menu setting for

Defaults

(page 3-60) is

Europe

, or using Letter (8.5x11) paper if

Defaults

is

USA

.

Demo Page

will cause a printer reset.

3-62

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 63 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

T e s t M e n u

Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions

(continued)

Function

PCL Font List

Description

Complete list of all PCL fonts currently available in the printer.

PCL fonts include those that are internal, on font card(s), and permanently downloaded soft fonts. See

Font Source

(page 3-19) for font storage locations.

The

PCL Font List

prints font number, typeface name, whether the font is fixed pitch or proportionally spaced, point size or scalable indication, orientation, other font characteristics, and a font sample.

Printing a

PCL Font List

will cause a printer reset, ejecting any partial pages and clearing any incomplete jobs, temporary fonts, and macros from memory.

Note

The

Font Number

(page 3-20) may change based on what fonts you have loaded and what

Symbol Set

(page 3-25) you are using.

PS Font List

Test Print

Complete list of the 35 PostScript language typefaces.

With PostScript installed, the

PS Font List

shows all resident PostScript fonts available in the printer, as well as a sample of each. Downloaded PostScript fonts are not shown.

“Test pattern” for analysis of print quality over the entire page; intended for use by service technicians.

The number of

Test Prints

produced is determined by

Copies

(page 3-19) and printed from the

Default Source

(page 3-21), both specified in the

PCL Menu

, using the paper size set in

Paper Size

(page 3-23).

Test Print

will cause a printer reset, clearing any incomplete jobs.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-63

AUG-CH03 Page 64 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

T e s t M e n u

Figure 3.22 Test Menu functions

(continued)

Function

Memory Check

Fuser Cleaning

Description

Complete check of printer memory (resident and any SIMMs installed) and a reporting of the results on the Control Panel display.

Memory Check

is more extensive than the check performed when the printer is powered on. When you invoke

Memory Check

, you will see:

Memory Check

Please Wait....

Before

Memory Check

, any partial pages are ejected and any incomplete print jobs, permanently downloaded fonts, and macros are cleared from memory. After

Memory Check

is finished, it reboots the printer to its power-on state.

If a problem occurs, the Control Panel will display a numeric diagnostic code. See

“Displayed Control Panel Messages” (page 7-5)

to locate the diagnostic message associated with the numeric code.

Invokes the fuser cleaning cycle, which is recommended each time the EP cartridge is replaced.

See

“Fuser Cleaning Cycle” (page 6-9)

for complete instructions on performing the fuser cleaning operation. When fuser cleaning is finished, the printer will be reset, clearing any incomplete print jobs.

3-64

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 65 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

R e s e t M e n u

Reset Menu

The

Reset Menu

offers several functions to reset various printer functions.

Options in the

Reset Menu

are

functions

to be performed by the printer rather than settings. There are no submenus.

Note

Reset Menu

Hierarchy

Figure 3.23 shows the

Reset Menu hierarchy

.

Note: The Reset I/f Cards option (as shown at right) is available for firmware release 4.0 only.

To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration Sheet.

Figure 3.23 Reset Menu hierarchy

Reset

Reset Printer

Reset Menus

Reset I/f Cards

Reset All

Cancel PS Job

Appears only when an optional network card is installed.

Appears only when the

PostScript option is installed.

Reset Menu

Functions

Figure 3.24 (page 3-66)

describes each

Reset Menu

function.

See

“Setting a Menu Option” (page 3-10)

for the steps in performing a

Reset Menu

function.

Note

For all types of reset (except

Reset I/F/Cards

for firmware release 4.0), the printer clears any temporarily downloaded fonts and print macros from memory, as well as ejects any partially printed pages.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-65

AUG-CH03 Page 66 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

R e s e t M e n u

Figure 3.24 Reset Menu options

Option

Reset Printer

Description

Reset of the printer’s PCL and PostScript printer languages to their power-on state.

Reset Printer

is useful when you have printing problems. First, cancel the print job from the host. Second, invoke

Reset Printer

.

Reset Printer

cancels any print jobs being processed and clears all temporary fonts and macros.

Note

Reset Printer

does not change the menu settings of any network option. However, any current print jobs being processed by a network option will be discarded.

Reset Menus

Reset I/f Cards

Note: This option is available for firmware release 4.0 only. To determine the firmware release of your printer, print a Configuration

Sheet.

Reset All

Reset of menus to their factory settings.

Reset Menus

does not affect the

Language

setting (page 3-14), the System

Menu

Defaults

setting (page 3-60), or the System Menu

Print Density

setting

(page 3-59).

The printer remains offline, so you can work with other menus.

Reset of network interface card(s) to their power-on state.

Reset I/f Cards

appears only if a network card is installed.

Use this type of reset if one or more of the network interfaces is not communicating properly.

Cancel PS Job

All reset functions are performed:

• Reset Printer

• Reset Menus

• Reset I/f Cards

Cancellation of the current PostScript job.

This function appears only if PostScript is installed.

The PostScript job is flushed from memory—the entire print job is discarded.

Cancel PS Job

is useful when a fault in your software application causes a

PostScript error. For example, a PostScript programming error could cause an infinite loop which

Cancel PS Job

would exit.

3-66

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 67 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y

Printer

Settings that

Affect

Memory

Certain

PCL Menu

and

PostScript Menu

options affect the printer’s performance and memory usage, as described in

“PCL Menu” (page 3-15)

and

“PostScript Menu” (page 3-29)

.

Figure 3.25 provides more detailed information on these options.

Figure 3.25 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect printing speed and memory usage

Option Description

Page Protection

PCL Menu

(page 3-26)

When a page is particularly complex with graphics or dense text, the printer may not be able to process it rapidly enough to keep up with normal printing operations. Data may be lost or one page may be split on multiple pages.

Page protection

is a technique that reserves memory to ensure the entire page can be created and printed before the actual printing process. The trade-off in performance is matched by the certainty that an entire complex page may be printed.

Page Protection

is related to

Resolution

(page 3-27 for PCL, page 3-35 for PostScript, and page 3-68) since the amount of memory needed for a page depends on its resolution. The higher the resolution, the more memory needed. See

Figure 3.26 (page 3-69)

for memory requirements.

Your software application may change the

Page Protection

level (e.g., from

Legal

to

Letter

). When that occurs, the printer’s memory is reconfigured. Downloaded fonts and macros may be cleared from memory unless

State Saving

(page 3-28 for PCL, page 3-36 for PostScript, and page 3-68) is set.

If any request for memory cannot be satisfied, you will be notified on the

Control Panel.

If you frequently see the following error message

Page Too Complex you may want to set

Page Protection

to be able to print the entire page.

Otherwise, if you do not see frequent warning messages, set

Page

Protection

Off

.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-67

AUG-CH03 Page 68 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y

Figure 3.25 PCL and PostScript Menu options that affect printing speed and memory usage

Option Description

Jam Recovery

PCL Menu

(page 3-26)

PostScript Menu

(page 3-35)

Resolution

PCL Menu

(page 3-27)

PostScript Menu

(page 3-35)

State Saving

PCL Menu

(page 3-28)

PostScript Menu

(page 3-36)

A paper jam may cause a page image being printed to become lost. When

Jam Recovery

is

On

, the printer will automatically reprint the image of the jammed page, after the jam has been cleared.

Because the printer holds a page image in memory longer with

Jam

Recovery

, if a low memory condition occurs there can be a slight performance impact and the printer may require more memory. If sufficient memory exists,

Jam Recovery

has no impact.

The printer prints at 600 or 300 dpi. The factory setting is 600 dpi.

Your software application may be able to set

Resolution

and override the setting here. Whether a new

Resolution

is set by your application or on the Control Panel, the new

Resolution

becomes effective with the next print job or with a printer reset. Unless

State Saving

(page 3-28 for PCL, page 3-36 for PostScript, and page 3-68) is

On

, downloaded fonts and macros may be cleared from memory.

The higher the resolution, the more memory required. See

Figure 3.26

(page 3-69)

for memory requirements.

When

State Saving

is

Off

, fonts and printer macros permanently downloaded from your software application are cleared from memory when:

• The printer switches from one page description language (PDL) to another (such as from PostScript to PCL).

• A memory reconfiguration takes place (such as for a new

Page

Protection

or

Resolution

setting).

When

State Saving

is

On

, the printer reserves memory to retain the downloaded fonts and macros. Thus, the fonts and macros do not have to be downloaded to memory again when switching PDLs or reconfiguring memory.

You may set

State Saving

separately for the PCL and the PostScript environments.

The printer requires 10 MB of memory to enable State Saving when

PostScript is installed. If PostScript is not installed, State Saving may be enabled with 6 MB of memory.

3-68

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH03 Page 69 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

P r i n t e r S e t t i n g s t h a t A f f e c t M e m o r y

Minimum Memory

Requirements

The memory requirements shown in Figure 3.26 provide for optimal memory usage and printer performance.

Note

If you encounter memory warning messages, try different combinations of

Resolution

and

Page Protection

before purchasing additional memory.

Figure 3.26 Minimum memory requirements

Setting 300 dpi

PCL with

Page Protection

Off

PCL with

Page Protection

set

PostScript (and PCL)

PostScript and/or PCL with

State Saving

On

2 MB

2 MB

6 MB

10 MB

600 dpi

2 MB

6 MB

6 MB

10 MB

Note

Install a 4 MB or 16 MB SIMM to increase printer memory capacity. See

Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options

for the

SIMM installation procedure.

C h a p t e r 3 : U s i n g t h e C o n t r o l P a n e l

3-69

AUG-CH03 Page 70 Black,Red Friday, February 3, 1995 12:22 AM

3-70

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH04 Page 1 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

Chapter 4

Using Fonts

4 r e t p a h C

Overview

...............................................................................

4-3

Bitmapped and Scalable Fonts 4-3

Where Fonts Reside 4-4

Fonts Resident on the Printer

..............................................

4-5

TrueType Fonts 4-6

Intellifont Fonts 4-7

PCL Bitmap Font 4-8

Adding Fonts

.........................................................................

4-9

PostScript 4-9

Font Cards 4-10

Fonts within Software Applications 4-11

Selecting a Font

..................................................................

4-12

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

4-1

AUG-CH04 Page 2 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

Downloading Fonts

............................................................

4-13

Temporary and Permanent Fonts 4-13

4-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH04 Page 3 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

O v e r v i e w

Overview

A

font

is a collection of characters of one typeface, one weight, and one posture. An example is Courier New Italic. A font generally contains uppercase and lowercase alphabets, numbers, and special characters such as punctuation marks.

A

font family

is composed of one typeface in all its available weights and postures. Courier New, for example, has medium, italic, bold, and bold italic.

Bitmapped and

Scalable Fonts

Fonts are normally categorized according to the manner in which they are generated:

Bitmapped

font

A bitmapped font contains digitized images of each character in the font. Each symbol (that is, character, number, or punctuation mark) is a

complete image

in digitized form.

Each symbol is stored as a bitmap (or raster) that represents the black or white parts of the symbol. The bitmaps are copied onto the paper when printing takes place.

Scalable

font

A scalable font contains characters described by mathematical formulae that produce

character outlines

.

A mathematical formula describes a line between two points which constitutes one line of the character’s outline. The images printed on paper are digitized as the page is being printed. During digitization, the image may be scaled, sloped, or rotated.

There exists a variety of mathematical models used to construct scalable fonts, but the two most popular are

Bézier and B-spline.

Scalable fonts are also known as

contour

or

outline

fonts.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

4-3

AUG-CH04 Page 4 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

O v e r v i e w

At one time, computers used bitmapped fonts only. One set of bitmapped fonts was needed to display characters on a terminal screen, and another set was needed for printing.

These were called

screen fonts

and

printer fonts

, respectively.

Today, software applications use many scalable fonts because they can be used for both screen and printer.

Where Fonts

Reside

Screen fonts

are always stored on the host computer, not the printer.

Printer fonts

may reside in three places:

Printer ROM

holds

resident

fonts, installed at the factory on memory chips on the printer controller board. See

“Fonts Resident on the Printer” (page 4-5)

for a complete list.

• A

font card

inserted into the printer holds additional PCL fonts. The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers provide two slots for font cards. See

Chapter 1: Introduction

(page 1-3) for font card location.

Software applications

contain additional fonts that may be

downloaded

to printer memory, in some cases, for the entire time the printer is turned on. See

“Downloading

Fonts” (page 4-13)

for more information.

4-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH04 Page 5 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r

Fonts

Resident on the Printer

The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped with resident fonts installed at the factory on memory chips on the printer controller board.

Resident fonts are used by software applications that communicate with the printer in

PCL (Printer Command

Language)

. See

Appendix B: Printer Commands (Escape

Sequences)

for more information on all PCL commands.

Note

The 4505ps and 4510ps printers are factory equipped with the

PostScript option that makes available 35 PostScript fonts. To review the PostScript fonts, print a

PS Font List

(page 3-63).

Also, refer to your PostScript reference documentation.

Resident fonts available to PCL include the following:

• 10 TrueType fonts. See

“TrueType Fonts” (page 4-6)

.

• 35 Intellifont fonts. See

“Intellifont Fonts” (page 4-7)

.

• 1 PCL Bitmap font. See

“PCL Bitmap Font” (page 4-8)

.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

4-5

AUG-CH04 Page 6 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r

TrueType

Fonts

TrueType

fonts are used by Microsoft Windows 3.1 or later and may be printed to PostScript and non-PostScript printers.

The

ten

resident TrueType fonts on the 4505/4505ps and

4510/4510ps printers are:

Arial

Arial Bold

Arial Bold Italic

Arial Italic

Symbol

Times New Roman

Times New Roman Bold

Times New Roman Bold Italic

Times New Roman Italic

Wingdings

4-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH04 Page 7 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r

Intellifont

Fonts

Intellifont

is a scalable font format. The printers are fully compatible with this font format and provide these 35 resident Intellifont fonts:

Antique Olive Medium

Antique Olive Italic

Antique Olive Bold

Albertus Medium

Albertus Extra Bold

CG Omega Medium

CG Omega Italic

CG Omega Bold

CG Omega Bold Italic

CG Times Medium

CG Times Italic

CG Times Bold

CG Times Bold Italic

Clarendon Cond. Bold

Coronet Medium Italic

Courier Medium

Courier Italic

Courier Bold

Courier Bold Italic

Garamond Antiqua

Garamond Kursiv

Garamond Halbfett

Garamond Kursiv Halbfett

Letter Gothic Medium

Letter Gothic Italic

Letter Gothic Bold

Marigold Medium

Univers Medium

Univers Italic

Univers Bold

Univers Bold Italic

Univers Cond. Medium

Univers Cond. Italic

Univers Cond. Bold

Univers Cond. Bold Italic

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

4-7

AUG-CH04 Page 8 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

F o n t s R e s i d e n t o n t h e P r i n t e r

PCL Bitmap Font

The printers have one resident bitmap font called

Line

Printer

. It comes in only one typeface, weight, and posture.

The Line Printer font may be used to provide:

• Line printer emulation for a print job.

• Backward compatibility for those applications that make use of the line printer font.

To review the PCL fonts in your printer, print a

PCL Font List

(page 3-63)

.

Note

4-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH04 Page 9 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

A d d i n g F o n t s

Adding Fonts

Utilizing fonts in addition to resident fonts can add new dimensions to your work. Additional fonts are available through the following:

• PostScript option. See

“PostScript” (page 4-9)

.

• Font cards for PCL fonts. See

“Font Cards” (page 4-10)

.

• Software applications. See

“Fonts within Software

Applications” (page 4-11)

.

PostScript

Thirty-five

PostScript

fonts (Adobe Type 1) are available to your printer, either factory-installed on the 4505ps and

4510ps printers, or user-installable on the 4505 and 4510 printers as an option. See

Appendix D: Ordering Information

for more information on the PostScript option.

Many additional PostScript fonts are available through Adobe

Systems, Inc. and may be used when the PostScript option is installed on your printer.

If you have a 4505ps or 4510ps printer, see

“PostScript Menu”

(page 3-29)

for PostScript printer settings.

PostScript fonts are used by the PostScript Level 2 printer language. If you plan to program in the PostScript Level 2 printer language, refer to Adobe Systems, Inc. PostScript language reference documentation.

Note

The

Lang. Sensing

settings in the Parallel (page 3-42), Serial

(page 3-46), Ethernet (page 3-52), and Token Ring (page 3-55)

Menus enable automatic switching between the PostScript and PCL printer languages.

PostScript and PCL fonts are not interchangeable

.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

4-9

AUG-CH04 Page 10 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

A d d i n g F o n t s

Font Cards

The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped with two font card slots. See page 1-3 for the physical location of the slots. See

Chapter 5: Adding Printer Options

for font card installation.

Font cards for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps contain PCL fonts only

. In addition, font cards may contain one or more scalable fonts or bitmapped fonts. However, bitmapped and scalable fonts are not mixed on the same card.

A font card may contain its own

default

font. In this case, its default font becomes the printer’s default font. To change the default font, see

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

,

Font

Source

(page 3-19).

!

Caution

To avoid problems when inserting or removing a font card, take the printer offline by pressing Online

PCL font cards may be purchased from Xerox / Rank Xerox.

See

Appendix D: Ordering Information

.

4-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH04 Page 11 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

A d d i n g F o n t s

Fonts within

Software

Applications

Certain software applications offer additional fonts to those supplied with your printer. These fonts are stored on the host and then

downloaded

into printer memory by the software application when printing.

Unless specified as permanently downloaded fonts (see page 4-13), software application fonts are downloaded to printer memory before being used for a specific printer job, and are removed from printer memory after completion of that print job.

Note

Installation of the Xerox printer driver provides the printer with the capability of recognizing which fonts are resident and which are not.

Selecting resident fonts saves memory and time

.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

4-11

AUG-CH04 Page 12 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

S e l e c t i n g a F o n t

Selecting a Font

How is a font selected for printing?

The general answer is that you select a font

within the application you are running

. For example, if you are using a word processing application, you will select a font

from the font list

within the application.

If desired, you may select a font (PCL fonts only) from the

Control Panel or Remote User Interface (RUI). For an explanation of how to do this, see

Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel

,

Font Number

(page 3-20), or refer to the

Documentation Services for Printing Guide

for the RUI.

A font selected from the Control Panel or RUI becomes the

default

font for the printer unless overridden by the selection of a different font from your software application.

4-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH04 Page 13 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s

Downloading

Fonts

Whether you do or do not use additional fonts, it is helpful to know a few facts about how the printer uses fonts either resident in the printer or

downloaded

(transferred) from the host.

Each time you specify a font in a document to be printed, the font is downloaded to printer,

unless the font is already

:

• Resident in the printer’s ROM (read-only memory)

—PCL only

.

• Specified in the printer driver as permanently downloaded to the printer’s internal memory

—PCL only

.

• Installed on the PostScript card

—PostScript only

.

• Installed on a font card

—PCL only

.

Consult your software application’s user documentation for a discussion of fonts associated with that application.

Temporary and

Permanent Fonts

Temporary fonts

are PCL fonts downloaded for a particular print job. As soon as the print job is finished, the fonts are cleared from memory.

They must be downloaded for each print job that uses them

. Downloading may have an impact on performance, depending on the number of fonts being downloaded. As a result, the print job using downloaded fonts may take longer than one using resident fonts.

As an example, when you print a mostly-text document in a resident font, printing time is optimal.

If you print that same document using a downloaded font, the time to print the first page is substantially longer than it was for your resident-font document. The remaining pages also take longer to print than those of the resident-font document.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

4-13

AUG-CH04 Page 14 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s

Note

For optimal performance, use

resident

fonts whenever applicable since they do not require downloading time.

Permanently downloaded fonts

are PCL fonts downloaded in the same way temporary fonts are, but they

remain downloaded

for all print jobs until the printer is powered off.

They are

permanent

only as long as the printer is on.

Similar to resident fonts or those on font cards, permanently downloaded fonts reduce the processing time for a print job that uses them. The distinction is that permanently downloaded fonts occupy printer memory that might be used otherwise.

How do you know if a font is permanently downloaded?

• Specify a font to be permanently downloaded when it is installed or setup within a software application.

• Print a

PCL Font List

(page 3-63) to see all resident fonts, all fonts installed on any font card, and

all permanently downloaded fonts

.

4-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH04 Page 15 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

D o w n l o a d i n g F o n t s

Note

In general, it is not recommended that you permanently download fonts. Even if unused, permanent fonts occupy printer memory that cannot be used for other purposes.

In a networked environment, carefully coordinate the use of permanently downloaded fonts. Avoid allowing multiple users to specify permanently downloaded fonts since printer memory may be consumed rapidly and may cause printer faults.

Additional memory (SIMMs) will enable the printer to hold more downloaded fonts. See Chapter 1: Introduction,

“Memory Considerations” (page 1-6) and Chapter 5: Adding

Printer Options for more information about printer memory.

C h a p t e r 4 : U s i n g F o n t s

4-15

AUG-CH04 Page 16 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:33 PM

4-16

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

Chapter 5

Adding Printer Options

5 r e t p a h C

Overview

...............................................................................

5-2

Installing a SIMM

..................................................................

5-4

Installing a Font Card

.........................................................

5-19

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-1

AUG-CH05 Page 2 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

O v e r v i e w

Overview

The following printer options are available for the

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers:

4 MB or 16 MB SIMM.

One 4 MB SIMM is factory-installed on the 4505ps and 4510ps printers

.

SIMMs (single in-line memory modules) are small circuit boards with memory chips that can be installed on the printer controller board. Up to two SIMMs can be installed in the printers. The maximum memory capacity of the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps is 16 MB. See

“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4)

.

PostScript

.

Factory-installed on the 4505ps and 4510ps printers

.

Adobe Postscript Level 2 is available to your printer, either factory-installed or as an option.

If using a 4505ps or 4510ps printer, refer to the

PostScript

Option Installation Instructions

packaged with the printer. Also, see

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

,

“PostScript Menu” (page 3-29)

.

250-sheet lower base

with paper tray

The 250-sheet lower base comes with a universal tray.

See

Chapter 2: Handling Paper

,

“Optional Lower Base”

(page 2-13)

.

500-sheet lower base

with paper tray

The 500-sheet lower base comes with either an A4 or

8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray. See

Chapter 2: Handling Paper

,

“Optional Lower Base” (page 2-13)

.

• Paper trays

A variety of trays may be ordered separately for the

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers. See

Chapter 2: Handling Paper

,

“Paper Trays” (page 2-8)

.

5-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 3 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

O v e r v i e w

• Ethernet card

The Xerox Network Interface Card – Ethernet

(XNIC-E’NET) supports the Novell, TCP/IP, EtherTalk,

DecLat, and LAN Manager protocols and is equipped with both BNC and RJ-45 connectors.

See

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

,

“Ethernet Menu

Options” (page 3-51)

.

• LocalTalk card

The Xerox Network Interface Card – LocalTalk

(XNIC-L’TALK) supports the AppleTalk protocols and is equipped with a DIN-8 connector.

See

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

,

“LocalTalk Menu

Option” (page 3-50)

.

• Token Ring card

The Xerox Network Interface Card – Token Ring

(XNIC-T’RING) supports the Novell and LAN Manager protocols and is equipped with both RJ-45 and female

DE-9 connectors.

See

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

,

“Token Ring

Menu Options” (page 3-54)

.

• Font card

Font cards are inserted into one or both of the font card slots in the printer. Font cards hold additional PCL fonts.

See

“Installing a Font Card” (page 5-19)

.

You can order any of these printer options from your dealer or

Xerox / Rank Xerox. See

Appendix D: Ordering Information

for complete details.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-3

AUG-CH05 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

Installing a

SIMM

Since SIMMs are available from manufacturers other than

Xerox and might not contain installation instructions for the

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers, installation instructions are provided here.

The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers are equipped with 2 MB of resident base memory. To expand printer memory capacity, install up to two 4 MB or 16 MB SIMMs on the printer controller board. (The total maximum memory capacity is 16 MB.)

Note

4505ps and 4510ps Users:

The 4505ps and 4510ps are each equipped with a pre-installed 4 MB SIMM for a total of 6 MB of memory.

To install a SIMM in the printer follow the steps below:

5-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

Be sure you have a ream of paper on hand before you begin this procedure.

1

Power OFF [0] the printer.

2

Disconnect the power cord and remove all cables.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-5

AUG-CH05 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

3

Remove any installed font cards.

4

Release the rear cover latches.

5-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

5

Remove the rear cover to expose the thumb screws.

6

With your fingers, loosen the thumbscrews.

Thumbscrews are not removable.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-7

AUG-CH05 Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

!

Caution

SIMMs and controller boards are sensitive to static electricity.

Before installing a SIMM, discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on the printer. If you walk around before finishing the installation, again discharge any static electricity.

Never remove the printer controller board while the printer is plugged in.

7

To remove the controller board, pull the handle with firm, but even force.

5-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

8

Place the controller board on a ream of paper.

This is required to properly support the board during installation of the

SIMM.

9

Locate the SIMM slots on the printer controller board.

If you need to replace a currently installed

SIMM, continue with

Step 10.

If you do not need to replace a SIMM, skip to Step 12 (page 5-11).

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-9

AUG-CH05 Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

!

Caution

When removing a SIMM, be careful not to damage the locking clips located at each end of the SIMM slot. They may break if too much pressure is applied.

10

Carefully release the clips of the SIMM you are replacing.

11

Lift the SIMM out of the slot.

5-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

12

Insert the new SIMM into either SIMM slot.

!

Caution

Be careful not to damage the locking clips located at each end of the SIMM slot. They may break if too much pressure is applied.

13

Press the SIMM down until the clips lock it in place.

The SIMM will sit at an angle.

Install additional

SIMMs in the same manner.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-11

AUG-CH05 Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

14

Replace the printer controller board.

Align the edge of the board in the guide rails and seat the controller board firmly.

15

Push the controller board firmly into place.

5-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

Inspect this area to verify that there is no gap between the printer controller board and the chassis.

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

16

Ensure that the controller board is touching the rear of the printer chassis.

There must be no space between the controller board and the chassis.

!

Caution

Use only finger pressure to tighten the thumbscrews. Do not use a screwdriver because the threads will be stripped if excessive torque is applied. The screwdriver slot in the thumbscrew is only there to start the disengagement of the controller board after an extended period of time when fingers may not be able to disengage it.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-13

AUG-CH05 Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

17

Tighten the thumbscrews using only your fingers.

Do not use tools.

Note

If the thumbscrews do not easily turn, reseat the controller board and try again.

18

Replace the rear cover.

5-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 15 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

19

Reinstall any font cards removed in

Step 3.

20

Reconnect cables and the power cord.

At this point, you need to print a Configuration Sheet to verify that you have properly installed the SIMMs.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-15

AUG-CH05 Page 16 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

1

Power ON [1] the printer.

If the printer does not turn on:

• Power OFF [0].

• Check all connections and the electrical supply outlet.

• Power ON [1].

If the printer still does not turn on, reseat the controller board.

2

On the Control Panel, you may briefly see some messages. Then you will see the message:

Online ___

Ready

3

Press Online

You will see:

Offline _/_

Press a key...

4

Press Menu

You will see:

Main Menu

Language >

5

Press Down or Up

Main Menu

Test Menu >

until you see:

5-16

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 17 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

6

Press Enter

You will see:

Test Menu

Config. Sheet

7

Press Enter again to start printing a

Configuration Sheet.

You will see:

Config. Sheet

Printing...

The Configuration Sheet requires a minute or so to print.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-17

AUG-CH05 Page 18 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a S I M M

Xerox 4510 Desktop Laser Printer

Configuration Sheet

Total prints = 0

Total system memory = 0 KB

Software version = 00.00.00 - 00.00.00

Installed options: None

Total system memory = nnnn KB

Main Menu

Language

System Menu

Hex Dump

Chime

System Messages

Auto Continue

Print Density

Defaults

PCL Menu

Copies

Font Source

Font Number

Pitch

Point Size

Default Source

Source Mapping

Standard

Manual

Manual Envelope

Lower

Large Capacity

Envelope Feeder

Paper Size

MP Tray Size

Orientation

Form Length

Symbol Set

Page Protection

Jam Recovery

Resolution

Resol.Enh.(EET)

State Saving

= English

= Off

= Once

= On

= Off

= 2

= USA

= 1

= Internal

= 0

= 10.00

= 12.00

= Standard

= Standard

= Manual

= Manual

= MP-Standard

= Standard-MP

= Manual

= A4 (210x297)

= A4 (210x297)

= Portrait

= 64

= Roman-8

= A4

= On

= 300x300

= On

= Off

Parallel Menu

Port Enable

Port Timeout

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Bidirectional

Transfer Rate

Serial Menu

Port Enable

Port Timeout

System Language

Lang. Sensing

Auto Job End

Port Type

Baud Rate

Handshake

DTR Polarity

Data Bits

Parity

Stop Bits

= On

= 30 s

= PCL

= On

= On

= On

= Low

= On

= 30 s

= PCL

= On

= On

= RS232

= 9600

= Robust XON

= High

= 8

= None

= 1

The Document Company

8

Verify the SIMM has been correctly installed.

On your Configuration Sheet, the “Total system memory” value should match the amount of memory you just installed plus the RAM resident on the printer.

Note that:

• 4 MB SIMM = 4096 KB

• 16 MB SIMM = 16384 KB

For example, if you installed a 4 MB SIMM on a new

4510:

Resident Memory 2048 KB

+ SIMM 4096 KB

======

Total 6144 KB

If the total system memory value is not correct, reinstall the SIMM.

The printer recognizes up to a total of 16 MB only.

Note

5-18

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH05 Page 19 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a F o n t C a r d

Installing a

Font Card

To install a font card in the printer, follow the steps below:

1

Press Online to take the printer offline.

O n l i n e _ _ _

R e a d y

2

Insert a font card into either font card slot.

O f f l i n e _ _ _

P r e s s a k e y . . .

3

Press Online to put the printer online.

C h a p t e r 5 : A d d i n g P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

5-19

AUG-CH05 Page 20 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 6:40 PM

I n s t a l l i n g a F o n t C a r d

4

To verify that the printer recognizes the font card as installed, print a PCL Font List (see page 3-63).

Note

When installing PCMCIA font cards, printing a PCL Font List will verify that the cards have been inserted correctly and are recognized by the printer. If the PCL Font List does not show the fonts on the cards, reinsert the font cards or cycle the power on the printer and print another PCL Font List to verify that the fonts on the PCMCIA cards are recognized.

5-20

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH06 Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

Chapter 6

Maintaining the Printer

6 r e t p a h C

Overview

...............................................................................

6-2

Replacing the EP Cartridge

..................................................

6-3

Fuser Cleaning Cycle

.............................................................

6-9

Adjusting the Print Density

...............................................

6-12

Cleaning the Printer

...........................................................

6-13

Transporting the Printer

.....................................................

6-14

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

6-1

AUG-CH06 Page 2 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

O v e r v i e w

Overview

Maintaining the printer in good operating condition is essential to having a reliable, well-running machine.

This chapter describes the following:

• EP (electronic printing) cartridge replacement

• Fuser cleaning

• Regular cleaning

• Hints for transporting the printer

6-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH06 Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

Replacing the

EP Cartridge

An EP (electronic printing) cartridge will print approximately

4,000 pages of A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) paper, under average operating conditions (5% area coverage). The number of prints per one EP cartridge will decrease if you routinely:

• Print dense text and graphics.

• Set

Print Density

(page 3-59) to a dark setting.

• Exceed five percent area coverage.

Note

An EP cartridge contains both

microfine toner

and

imaging drum

.

The EP cartridge is clean, efficient, and can be recycled.

The printer will alert you to the need to replace the EP cartridge by displaying this message:

Toner Low

To order a new EP cartridge (part number 113R5), contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

6-3

AUG-CH06 Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

To replace the EP cartridge, follow the steps below:

1

Remove the

Multipurpose (MP) tray, if installed.

!

Caution

To avoid damaging the hinge, support the front cover with your hands while opening it. Do not allow the cover to fall open.

2

Press the side latches down to release and open the front cover.

6-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH06 Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

!

Caution

Follow these guidelines to make sure the EP cartridge is properly installed:

• Do not expose the EP cartridge to direct sunlight or fluorescent light for more than 15 minutes. Overexposure will permanently damage the photosensitive imaging drum.

• Do not open the drum shutter or touch the imaging drum.

• Complete the EP cartridge installation within 15 minutes of removing it from its package.

3

Remove the old EP cartridge.

Please recycle it.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

6-5

AUG-CH06 Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

4

Unwrap, then shake the new EP cartridge 6 to 8 times to evenly distribute the toner.

!

Caution

To avoid breaking the tab or tape, pull the tab

out, not up

. If the tab separates from the tape, continue to pull the tape.

5

Place the EP cartridge on a flat surface; pull the tab and tape from the EP cartridge.

You may have to pull firmly.

Dispose of the tab and tape.

6-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH06 Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

6

Insert the EP cartridge into the guide channels marked by yellow arrows.

The cartridge fits securely inside the printer.

7

Close the front cover.

Be sure the cover is completely closed and latches locked.

If the front cover does not close, reseat the

EP cartridge.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

6-7

AUG-CH06 Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

R e p l a c i n g t h e E P C a r t r i d g e

8

If needed, reinstall the

Multipurpose (MP) tray.

9

Perform the Fuser Cleaning Cycle.

See

“Fuser Cleaning Cycle” (page 6-9)

for the fuser cleaning procedure.

6-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH06 Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e

Fuser

Cleaning Cycle

To run the fuser cleaning cycle, follow the steps below.

Note

Whenever you replace an EP cartridge, run the fuser cleaning cycle. This will prevent paper jams caused by dirty fuser components.

1

On the Control Panel, press Online

You will see:

Offline _/_

Press a key...

The fuser cleaning process uses

three

sheets of A4 or

8.5 x 11 (Letter) paper. Be sure there is paper loaded in the standard paper source.

2

Press Menu

You will see:

Main Menu

Language >

3

Press Up or Down

Main Menu

Test Menu >

4

Press Enter

You will see:

Test Menu

Config. Sheet

until you see:

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

6-9

AUG-CH06 Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e

5

Press Up or Down

Test Menu

Fuser Cleaning

until you see:

6

Press Enter

You will see:

Fuser Cleaning

Printing...

Three sheets of paper—called the

cleaning sheets

—will be printed with a black band across the page.

7

Wait for the Control Panel to display:

Fuser Cleaning

Waiting...

All three cleaning sheets will have been printed.

8

Place the three cleaning sheets PRINTED SIDE

DOWN, arrow toward the printer, in the standard paper tray.

9

Press Enter

You will see:

Fuser Cleaning

Please Wait...

to begin the fuser cleaning cycle.

No print image will be made while the cleaning sheets are being processed.

10

When the cleaning process is complete, the Control

Panel display automatically returns to:

Main Menu

Test Menu >

6-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH06 Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

F u s e r C l e a n i n g C y c l e

11

On the Control Panel, press Online

You will see:

Online ___

Ready

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

6-11

AUG-CH06 Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

A d j u s t i n g t h e P r i n t D e n s i t y

Adjusting the Print

Density

The print density was adjusted at the factory to provide optimum print quality. However, should you desire to darken or lighten the print density, follow the steps below.

1

Select the System Menu (see page 3-57).

2

Select Print Density.

The print choices are from 0 to 4. 0 is the lightest and 4 is the darkest.

If the desired print density cannot be achieved, see

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting

,

“Print Quality Problems”

(page 7-29).

6-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH06 Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

C l e a n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

Cleaning the Printer

For optimum performance, the printer should not be placed near vents or dust-producing equipment. Particles in the air may enter the printer and cause failures in internal mechanisms

For best results, clean the outside of the printer with a damp cloth. Do not use detergents.

!

Caution

Make sure the printer is powered OFF [0] before you clean it.

C h a p t e r 6 : M a i n t a i n i n g t h e P r i n t e r

6-13

AUG-CH06 Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:29 AM

T r a n s p o r t i n g t h e P r i n t e r

Transporting the Printer

When transporting the printer more than a short distance, follow the guidelines shown in Figure 6.1.

Figure 6.1

Hints for transporting the printer

Helpful Hints for Moving the Printer

Use the original shipping box and materials. If the original box or materials are not available or are unusable, use a sturdy packing box and a generous amount of cushioning or packing material.

1.

Remove and pack the Multipurpose Tray.

2.

Remove the EP cartridge and pack it in sturdy, light-proof material.

A sealed bag is recommended to prevent toner leakage.

3.

Push in the Output Tray support so that it is flush with the edge of the printer.

4.

Disconnect and pack the printer. Remove and pack all printer cables.

If the printer is on a network, refer to your network software guide or consult with the Network Administrator before disconnecting the network cable.

5.

Disconnect and pack the power cord.

6.

Locate and pack all documentation for the printer.

7.

Place the printer, accessories, and documentation in the original box or in a similar box.

8.

Make sure packing materials will inhibit breakage and jarring.

6-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 1 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

Chapter 7

Troubleshooting

7 r e t p a h C

Overview

...............................................................................

7-2

Before Calling for Service 7-2

Locating Your Printer’s Serial Number 7-4

Displayed Control Panel Messages

.....................................

7-5

Paper Jams

..........................................................................

7-19

Clearing Paper Jams from the Standard Tray or Lower

Base 7-21

Clearing Paper Jams from the MP tray 7-25

Printer Operational Problems

............................................

7-26

Print Quality Problems

.......................................................

7-29

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-1

AUG-CH07 Page 2 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

O v e r v i e w

Overview

Before Calling for

Service

This chapter lists some problems you might encounter while using your 4505/4505ps or 4510/4510ps, and provides some possible solutions to these problems. This chapter will help you troubleshoot problems associated with:

• Displayed control panel messages

• Paper transport

• Printer operation

• Deterioration of print quality

If you encounter a problem, locate the type of problem in this section and perform the suggested corrective actions. If you are unable to resolve the problem, contact your dealer or

Xerox / Rank Xerox for service.

Before calling for service, be sure you have thoroughly reviewed the troubleshooting section provided for your type of problem and have performed the suggested corrective actions.

When calling for service, be prepared to provide the following information:

• The serial number of your printer. See

“Locating Your

Printer’s Serial Number” (page 7-4)

.

• Your name and your company’s name

• A description of the problem, including the severity of the problem:

Critical

Printer is down and/or user has no production capability

– inability of a critical application (job) to run

– frequency of failure precludes production use

– critical integrity defect

7-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 3 Black Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

O v e r v i e w

Serious

Printer is operational but production capability is seriously degraded

– inability of a major application (job) to run

– failure requires frequent operational intervention to

maintain productivity

– non-critical integrity defect

Moderate

Printer is operational, but production capability is reduced

– a non-critical application (job) can not be printed

– continuing, but infrequent failure requiring

operational intervention

– a non-critical product feature or function does not

work

• If any special conditions have occurred:

— New application (job) being run?

— Did application run correctly before?

— Have there been any modifications to the application

(job)?

— Have there been any modifications to the host system?

— Has service been performed recently on the printer?

— Does application (job) print properly on another printer (either Xerox or other type which supports same emulation)?

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-3

AUG-CH07 Page 4 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

O v e r v i e w

Locating Your

Printer’s Serial

Number

Also have available:

• Any error code or message displayed on the Control

Panel

• A copy of the Configuration Sheet

• A copy of the output with the problem

• A copy of the print job as it was input

If possible, be near the printer when you call so you can perform any suggested corrective actions.

Your printer’s serial number is located on the printer frame behind the rear cover. See Figure 7.1.

Figure 7.1

Locating your printer’s serial number

serial number

7-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 5 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Displayed

Control Panel

Messages

Control Panel messages are listed in alphabetical order in

Figure 7.2, preceded by numerical diagnostic error codes.

Not listed are the Control Panel menu options, settings, or functions covered in

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

.

Note

Some two-line messages are separated by the top line and bottom line. In these instances, look up each line of the message separately.

In Figure 7.2, “

ACTION

” indicates what you must do to respond to or clear the message.

You might see a five digit number in the lower right of the

Control Panel. Five-digit codes are for use by manufacturing and service centers only. The user can ignore five-digit codes.

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

Message

0001

Appears in the top left side of the display.

Indicates which module failed.

0040

Appears in the top left side of the display.

Indicates which module failed.

0100

Appears in the top left side of the display.

Indicates which module failed.

Description/Action

The main controller board has failed.

ACTION: Replace controller, or contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

A PostScript checksum error has occurred.

ACTION: The PostScript card has failed and needs to be replaced.

SIMM in slot 0 has failed.

ACTION: Move the SIMM to Slot 1; see

“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4)

. If a memory error (0101) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error, the main controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-5

AUG-CH07 Page 6 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message

0101

Appears in the top left side of the display.

Indicates which module failed.

1000

Appears in the top left side of the display.

Indicates which module failed.

2000

Appears in the top left side of the display.

Indicates which module failed.

Both Cards Out

Replace Original

Card Err. both

Power Off & On

Close Cover

Comm. Error

Description/Action

SIMM in slot 1 has failed.

ACTION: Move the SIMM to Slot 0; see

“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4)

. If a memory error (0100) occurs again, replace the SIMM. If there is no error, the main controller board has failed. Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Communication has failed between the printer controller and the printer.

ACTION: Verify the controller board is seated properly. If the message still appears, replace the controller, replace the interface between the controller and printer engine, or replace the print engine; or, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

A key on the Control Panel is stuck in the down position.

ACTION: Press any key. If no response, the Control Panel may need to be replaced.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Upper and lower font cards were removed while the printer was offline, but the cards were still being used by the software application.

ACTION: To clear the error message and resume printing, reseat or reinstall the cards. Press

Online

On completion of the print job, you can take the printer offline and remove the cards.

Both the upper and lower font cards were removed while the printer was online.

ACTION: Power OFF the printer, then power it ON to resume.

The main cover is open.

ACTION: Close it, then press

Online

to resume normal operation.

If your printer is configured for

serial

, a framing or parity error has occurred on the serial interface.

ACTION: You have a mismatch between your printer and the host. Check your printer serial configuration (baud rate, handshake, parity, etc.) to be certain the serial settings match your host (page 3-45). If problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

If your printer is configured for

parallel

, the printer is not able to communicate with the host using bidirectional parallel.

ACTION: Check the parallel cable to make sure it is connected properly on both the printer and the host. Inspect the parallel cable for any defects; if wires are broken or the cable appears to be damaged, replace the cable. Check the host to be certain that it is configured properly. Under the Parallel Menu, turn

Bidirectional

Off

. If problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

7-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 7 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message Description/Action

Config. Sheet

Printing...

Ethernet Fail

Flushing…

Fuser Cleaning

Please Wait...

Fuser Cleaning

Printing...

Fuser Cleaning

Waiting...

Fuser Failure

Service Required

Hex Dump

The Configuration Sheet is printing.

See

Config. Sheet

, page 3-62.

ACTION: None

The Ethernet card (XNIC-E’NET) has failed and cannot be used.

ACTION: Press

Enter

to allow the printer to continue as if the Ethernet card were not installed. This error is not subject to

Auto Continue

(page 3-59). Print a

Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show Ethernet as present, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

For PostScript only, the print job could not be printed and is being parsed out and discarded.

ACTION: The message remains until the print job being flushed is complete, which may require further data to be sent from the host.

The

Fuser Cleaning

(page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.

This message appears when the three cleaning sheets have been printed, placed in the input tray, and are now being fed into the printer.

ACTION: None

The

Fuser Cleaning

(page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.

The three cleaning sheets are being printed.

ACTION: None

The

Fuser Cleaning

(page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.

The cleaning sheets have been printed.

ACTION: Place the three cleaning sheets, printed side down and arrow toward printer, in the standard paper tray. Press

Enter

Fuser assembly has failed; printing cannot resume.

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Hex dump mode is

On

.

Used for debugging. See

Hex Dump

(page 3-58).

ACTION: None

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-7

AUG-CH07 Page 8 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message Description/Action

Install

EP Cartridge

IOT NVM Fail

Service Required

Laser Failure

Service Required

Last Page

The EP cartridge is missing or not installed correctly.

ACTION: Reseat existing cartridge or install a new cartridge. See

“Replacing the EP

Cartridge” (page 6-3)

. If problem continues, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Nonvolatile Memory (NVM) has failed on the print engine (also called the

IOT—Image Output Terminal). Printing cannot resume.

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Laser assembly has failed; printing cannot continue.

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

The printer was busy processing data from a host but the last page was not completed and the last page timeout has expired.

This message appears until either:

• More data arrives.

or

Port Time Out

expires and

Auto Job End

is

On

.

or

• PostScript “waittimeout” expires.

ACTION: None.

ACTION: Load A4 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

Load A4

Load A5

Load B5

ACTION: Load A5 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

This message is for the manual bypass slot (MP tray) only.

ACTION: Load B5 (ISO) paper into the MP tray.

ACTION: Load C5 paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

Load C5

Load Com-10

Load DL

Load Exec

Load Folio

ACTION: Load Com-10 envelopes (or paper) into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Load DL envelopes (or paper) into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Load Executive paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

ACTION: Load Folio paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

7-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 9 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message Description/Action

ACTION: Load Legal paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

Load Legal

Load Letter

ACTION: Load Letter paper into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

Load Monarch

LocalTalk Fail

Lower

Lower Card Err

Power OFF & ON

Lower Card Out

Replace Original

Lower Tray Empty

Lower Tray Out

Low-Std-MP

Lower-MP

ACTION: Load Monarch envelopes into the tray(s) indicated on the top line of the display.

The LocalTalk card (XNIC-L’TALK) has failed and cannot be used.

ACTION: Press

Enter

to allow the printer to continue as if the LocalTalk card were not installed. This error is not subject to

Auto Continue

(page 3-59). Print a

Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show LocalTalk as present, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Lower tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper to load. Either load that size or press

Enter

Lower font card was removed while the printer was online.

ACTION: Power OFF [0] the printer, then power it ON [1] to resume normal operations.

Lower font card was removed while the printer was offline, but the card was still being used by the software application.

ACTION: To clear the error message, take the printer offline and return the card to its slot. Then press

Online

to resume printing. On completion of the print job, you can take the printer offline and remove the card.

The lower tray does not contain paper.

ACTION: Load paper in the lower tray.

The lower tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.

ACTION: Insert lower tray.

Paper needs to be added to the lower, standard, or MP tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

Paper needs to be added to the lower or MP tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-9

AUG-CH07 Page 10 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message

Lower-Standard

MP Tray

MP-Low-Std

MP-Lower

MP-Standard

MP-Std-Low

Memory Check

Please Wait...

Memory Failure

Service Required

NV Memory Fail

Service Required

Description/Action

Paper needs to be added to the lower or standard tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

The printer is requesting paper in the MP tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper to insert. You may use the paper size requested or any size the MP tray will accept. If the paper size requested is not the same as the MP Tray Size, press

Enter

See

“Multipurpose Tray” (page 2-11)

.

Paper needs to be added to the MP, lower, or standard tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

Paper needs to be added to the MP or lower tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

Paper needs to be added to the MP or standard tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

Paper needs to be added to the MP, standard, or lower tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

Memory Check

was invoked from the Test Menu. See

“Test Menu” (page 3-61)

.

The printer resets upon completion.

ACTION: None

Printer controller memory has failed; printing cannot resume.

ACTION:

• Perform a

Memory Check

(page 3-64) to see if you can locate the problem.

• Try powering OFF [0] the printer then ON [1] again.

If the problem persists, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Nonvolatile memory in the printer engine or controller has failed; printing cannot resume.

ACTION: Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

7-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 11 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message

Offline _/_

Online ___

Open Cover

Clear Paper Path

Out of Memory

Description/Action

Printer is offline, not in menu mode, and without any fault conditions.

Offline does not mean the printer is disconnected from the computer. It means page formatting and printing are halted.

ACTION: To put the printer online, press

Online

Printer is online and either processing data or ready to accept print jobs.

ACTION: None

Printer has a paper jam.

ACTION: Open the cover and remove paper from the paper path. See

“Paper

Jams” (page 7-19)

.

Current job cannot print because it exceeds available memory.

See

“Printer Settings that Affect Memory” (page 3-67)

.

• For PCL, the bottom line displays,

Press *

Auto Continue

(page 3-59) may be

On

, you will see the message below for ten seconds:

Press *

– The printer waits ten seconds, then resumes (in effect, pressing

Enter

for you).

• For PostScript, it displays

Flushing...

The page is ejected from the printer. Depending on the cause of the problem, your print job may continue or be ended.

ACTION:

• Reduce resolution to 300 dpi.

• Install additional memory. See

“Installing a SIMM” (page 5-4)

.

• Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-11

AUG-CH07 Page 12 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message

Page Too Complex

PCL Font List

Printing...

Please Read

Last Print

Power Saver

On

Press *

Press a key...

Processing...

Description/Action

In PCL, the printing on a page is broken up into horizontal bands. When

Page

Protection

is

Off

, as a page is processed, each band has a limited time to be composed and imprinted on the page.

Page Too Complex means the current page cannot print because there is not enough time to compose it.

ACTION: Press

Enter

The page will be ejected and the print job will continue. The page that was too complex will be printed on more than one sheet of paper. To achieve printing on one sheet, set

Page Protection

(page 3-26) to the appropriate page size and send the print job again.

Even though

Auto Continue

(page 3-59) may be

On

, you will see the message below for ten seconds:

Press *

The printer waits ten seconds, then resumes (in effect, pressing

Enter

you).

for

PCL Font List

(page 3-63) is printing.

ACTION: None

The

Fuser Cleaning

(page 3-64) function has been selected from the Test Menu.

Three fuser cleaning sheets have been printed.

ACTION: Read and follow the instructions printed on the fuser cleaning sheets.

Power consumption is reduced by means of the power saver mode.

When no printing has occurred for 10 minutes, the printer will automatically go into Power Saver mode.

ACTION: None (Treat this message the same as the “Online/Ready” message.)

The printer has a PCL error.

ACTION: Press

Enter

This message functions with the System Menu option

Auto Continue

(page 3-59). When

Auto Continue

is

On

, this message is cleared automatically after ten seconds, and normal printing operation resumes.

The printer has just been taken offline.

ACTION: No more processing can take place until you press another key (any key).

Printer is processing data from a computer for printing.

ACTION: None

7-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 13 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message Description/Action

PS Font List

Printing...

Ready

Reset Menus

Please Wait...

Reset Printer

Please Wait...

Self Test...

Standard

Standard-Lower

Standard-MP

Std-Low-MP

List of PostScript fonts (page 3-63) is printing.

ACTION: None

Printer is online and waiting for data to print.

ACTION: None

Reset Menus

has been invoked from the Reset Menu (page 3-65).

Returns all menu settings except the

Language

(page 3-14) setting and the

System Menu

Defaults

(page 3-60) setting to their factory setting and clears any print jobs, temporary fonts, and macros from memory.

ACTION: None

Reset Printer

or

Reset All

has been invoked from the Reset Menu (page 3-65).

The printer clears any print jobs and temporary fonts and macros from memory, then goes online.

ACTION: None

The printer is in power-on diagnostics. This message appears shortly after power-on as soon as the Control Panel is initialized and can display text.

If there is no failure during power-on diagnostics, the next message displayed will indicate the printer is online and ready to receive data.

ACTION: None

Standard tray needs paper.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what size paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

Paper needs to be added to either the standard or lower tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

Paper needs to be added to either the standard or MP tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

Paper needs to be added to the standard, lower, or MP tray.

ACTION: The message on the bottom line advises what type of paper or envelope to load. Either load that size, or press

Enter

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-13

AUG-CH07 Page 14 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message

Std. Tray Empty

Std. Tray Out

Temp Font/Macro

Test Print

Printing...

Token Ring Fail

Toner Low

Turn Power Off

Then On

Upper Card Err

Power Off & On

Description/Action

The standard tray does not contain paper.

ACTION: Add paper to the standard tray.

The standard tray has been removed or is not properly inserted.

ACTION: Insert the standard tray.

The printer was busy processing PCL data from a host system but the job was not completed since temporary fonts and macros were not deleted. The last page timeout has expired.

This message appears until:

• Another print job is received.

• The

Port Timeout

expires and

Auto Job End

is

On

. See

Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel

,

“Interface Menu” (page 3-37)

.

ACTION: None

A Test Print is being printed (for use by service technicians).

The message clears once the printing is completed.

ACTION: None

The Token Ring card (XNIC-T’RING) has failed and cannot be used.

ACTION: Press

Enter

to allow the printer to continue as if the Token Ring card were not installed. This error is not subject to

Auto Continue

(page 3-59).

Print a Configuration Sheet. If the sheet does not show Token Ring as present, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Toner is getting low in the EP cartridge, but printing will continue without interruption.

ACTION: Replace the EP cartridge as soon as possible.

A fatal error has occurred.

ACTION: Power OFF [0], then ON [1].

Upper font card was removed while the printer was online.

ACTION: Power OFF [0] the printer, then power it ON [1] to resume normal operations.

7-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 15 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message Description/Action

Upper Card Out

Replace Original

Waiting...

Warming up

Please Wait...

Warning 300/A4

Warning 300/A5

Upper font card was removed while the printer was offline, but the card was still being used by the application.

ACTION: To clear the error message, take the printer offline and return the card to its slot. Then press

Online

to resume printing. On completion of the print job, you can take the printer offline and remove the card.

The printer was busy processing data from a host but the print job was not completed.

This message appears until:

• Another print job is received.

• The

Port Timeout

expires and

Auto Job End

is

On

. See

Chapter 3: Using the

Control Panel

,

“Interface Menu” (page 3-37)

.

• The last page timeout expires.

• The PostScript “waittimeout” expires. Refer to the PostScript reference documentation.

ACTION: None

Fuser has not warmed up yet.

Message disappears when the printer is ready. The message displays at power-on and may display after the cover has been opened for some time or when the printer is exiting power-saver mode.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to A4; appears in PostScript when the page size is A4 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to A5; appears in PostScript when the page size is A5 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-15

AUG-CH07 Page 16 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message

Warning 300/B5

Warning 300/C10

Warning 300/C5

Warning 300/DL

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to B5; appears in PostScript when the page size is B5 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Com-10; appears in PostScript when the page size is Com-10 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to C5; appears in PostScript when the page size is C5 and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to DL; appears in PostScript when the page size is DL and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

7-16

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 17 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message

Warning 300/EXE

Warning 300/FOL

Warning 300/LGL

Warning 300/LTR

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Executive; appears in PostScript when the page size is Executive and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Folio; appears in PostScript when the page size is Folio and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Legal; appears in PostScript when the page size is Legal and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Letter; appears in PostScript when the page size is Letter and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-17

AUG-CH07 Page 18 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

D i s p l a y e d C o n t r o l P a n e l M e s s a g e s

Figure 7.2

Control Panel messages

(continued)

Message

Warning 300/MON

Warning 300/OFF

Description/Action

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to Monarch; appears in PostScript when the page size is Monarch and the printer has changed resolution to 300.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

This message appears in PCL when the printer has changed resolution to 300 or page protection to OFF.

This is a transient warning to advise that, due to insufficient memory to print with the requested settings, either the resolution or page protection has been changed.

The message clears when the next job prints.

ACTION: None

7-18

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 19 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P a p e r J a m s

Paper Jams

Your printer has been designed to provide reliable, trouble free operation. However, it is not unusual to experience an occasional paper jam. Paper jams occur most often when:

• The paper stock does not meet specification. See

“Paper

Specifications” (page 2-6)

.

• The paper stock is in poor condition.

• The paper stock has been improperly loaded into the paper trays. See

“Loading Paper” (page 2-14)

.

• The printer needs cleaning. See

“Fuser Cleaning Cycle”

(page 6-9)

.

• Printer parts have worn and need to be replaced.

When first powered ON, the printer detects any jammed paper. The movement of paper through the printer is constantly being monitored by the printer’s controllers.

When the printer detects a misfeed or a paper jam, the printing process is halted, and the Control Panel message

Open Cover

Clear Paper Path is displayed. This message indicates that a jam was detected in the printer. The entire paper path should be checked each time a paper jam is cleared.

After the paper jam has been cleared, the printer will resume operation to complete the print job.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-19

AUG-CH07 Page 20 Black Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P a p e r J a m s

The paper path is depicted in Figure 7.3. (The figure includes the optional lower base.)

Figure 7.3

Printer paper path

The following section provides detailed step-by-step procedures for clearing paper jams as well as some tips to help troubleshoot reoccurring jams.

7-20

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 21 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

Clearing Paper

Jams from the

Standard Tray or

Lower Base

P a p e r J a m s

1

If the MP Tray is installed, remove it before opening the

Front Cover.

2

Open the front cover by pressing down on the release latches on both sides of the front cover.

!

Caution

The area inside the printer near the fuser may be hot.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-21

AUG-CH07 Page 22 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P a p e r J a m s

3

Remove any paper visible in the paper transportation area inside the printer by gently pulling it upward.

!

Caution

Paper removed from this area may have unfused toner on it which will soil your hand or clothing if touched.

4

Remove any paper entering the fuser area by gently pulling the paper toward the front of the printer.

Note

If paper is well into the fuser, it can be removed by pulling the jammed sheet toward the rear of the printer. See Step 5.

7-22

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 23 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P a p e r J a m s

5

Remove any paper exiting the fuser area by gently pulling it toward the rear of the printer.

6

Close the Front Cover.

Note

When the Lower Base is in use when a jam occurs, the standard tray may need to be removed to clear a paper jam. Check for paper that may be jammed between the

Lower Base and the standard tray slot.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-23

AUG-CH07 Page 24 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P a p e r J a m s

7

Remove the paper tray(s) in use and remove any paper that may have been misfed out of the paper tray(s).

8

Ensure that the paper is loaded correctly into the tray(s) with the lead edges under the metal corners tabs.

If a universal tray is being used, ensure that the paper guides are adjusted against the paper stock. See

“Loading the Standard or Lower Paper Tray”

(page 2-14)

.

7-24

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 25 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P a p e r J a m s

Clearing Paper

Jams from the

MP tray

1

When the multi-purpose (MP) tray is being used and a jam occurs, remove all the paper in the tray.

2

Remove any paper that has partially fed into the MP slot.

3

4

Remove the MP tray.

Open the front cover and remove any paper that is in the paper transport areas. See “Clearing Paper Jams from the Standard Tray or Lower Base” (page 7-21),

Steps 1 through 5, to assure all paper has been removed from the paper path.

5

6

7

Close the front cover.

Reinstall the MP tray.

Reload paper stock into the MP tray.

Note

Regardless of where the paper is jammed, you must open and close the Front Cover to clear the “Open Cover Clear

Paper Path” Control Panel message.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-25

AUG-CH07 Page 26 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s

Printer

Operational

Problems

Figure 7.4 lists common operational problems and recommended actions.

Figure 7.4

Printer Operational Problems

Problem

Printer will not print

A file sent from the host does not print

Action

1.

Power printer OFF, then ON.

2.

Print a Configuration Sheet (see

page 3-62

).

• If Configuration Sheet prints, printer is OK. Check your software application and your printer connection. See below.

• If Configuration Sheet does not print, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

1.

Check if printer is Online.

2.

Send a plain text file (i.e., one without printing commands embedded in it) to the printer. (You may need to depress the form feed key when the LED remains lit if Auto Job End is not set.)

• If file prints correctly in the default font, with all of the characters in the original file, the printer is seeing the same data that the host is sending, and the interface or communication line is functioning correctly.

• If no data prints (or the last page indicator does not come on):

A. Check configuration to be certain the printer is configured properly.

B.

If using the parallel or serial port, the port may be disabled on the printer. Check the Configuration Sheet for the port you are using to see if Port Enable is ON. If OFF, set to ON and try again.

C. If using an optional Xerox network interface card (XNIC) (i.e.,

Ethernet, LocalTalk, or Token Ring), check the Configuration Sheet to see if the printer is acknowledging that the XNIC is present. (Refer to XNIC installation instructions packaged with the option.)

– If the XNIC is not acknowledged, power OFF printer and unplug. Pull out controller board, remove the XNIC and check that connector pins are not bent. If bent, straighten. Reseat the

XNIC securely, put controller board back in printer, power ON and print Configuration Sheet. If XNIC is still not acknowledged, the XNIC has failed. Contact your dealer or

Xerox / Rank Xerox.

– If the XNIC is acknowledged, check if printer is recognized by the host. (Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter of the respective XNIC installation guide.)

7-26

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 27 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.4

Printer Operational Problems

(continued)

Problem Action

A printed page does not look like it should

D. If garbled data, check Configuration Sheet to confirm that the correct emulation is selected or Language Sensing is ON. Also, check that data transfer matches host configuration (i.e., Transfer Rate,

Baud Rate, Handshake, Data Bits, etc.). If not, correct configuration on printer and try again.

1.

Make certain that the software application you are using to create your print job is configured properly. Refer to your software documentation.

2.

Send a file containing PCL or PostScript commands to the printer.

• If your page prints as it should, your printer and interface are functioning properly.

• If your information prints correctly, but doesn’t look right, you may have:

– An error in your command sequence/operator

– A missing downloaded font

– A mismatched printer option against your host formatting

– A missing or misaligned font card

• Command errors may be identified by looking at your input file or by using the Hex Dump feature on the printer. You can determine which fonts are in the system by printing a PCL or PS Font List. And you can verify your data setup by printing a Configuration Sheet and checking your printer setup.

In a job, a requested font, which is on a font card, does not print

1.

Print a PCL Font List (See

Chapter 3

.)

• If your requested fonts print on the Font List, your print job may need correcting.

• If your requested fonts do not print on the Font List, power the printer

OFF, remove and reinstall the font card. Power the printer back ON, and print another PCL Font List.

• If font card is still not being recognized, try another slot or font card, then print another Font List.

– If a different font slot works, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox to correct the defective slot.

– If a new font card is recognized, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox about replacing the defective card.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-27

AUG-CH07 Page 28 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t e r O p e r a t i o n a l P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.4

Printer Operational Problems

(continued)

Problem Action

The text printed is a listing of the PostScript commands instead of the PostScript job

A legal document prints but the edges are cut off

A PostScript job fails to print

1.

Make certain that the software application you are using to create your job is configured properly. Refer to your software documentation.

2.

If Language Sensing is set to OFF, make certain that the

System Language

setting for the port you are using is set to PostScript. See the

“Interface Menu

Hierarchy” (page 3-37)

.

3.

If Language Sensing is set to ON, the job sent to the printer might have included an incorrect header and therefore not have indicated that a

PostScript Job was being sent.

• Set System Language to PostScript in the appropriate Interface Menu (i.e.

Parallel, Serial, etc.) and try sending the job again.

• Check your software to make sure the PostScript header file is being sent to the printer.

1.

Set Page Protection to Legal. If page is still being clipped, more memory needs to be installed.

1.

Check the configuration and be certain the proper emulation is selected; also check the configuration of your printer driver configuration.

2.

If Language Sensing is set to ON, set System Language to PostScript in the appropriate Interface Menu (i.e. Parallel, Serial, etc.) and resend the job.

3.

Set Print Errors to ON and resend job.

• If error page prints, this means that there is a problem in the PostScript coding. Correct the coding problem and resend the job.

• If job does not print and no error page was printed, set Page Protection to OFF.

• If job still does not print, this job may require additional memory.

7-28

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 29 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Print Quality

Problems

Figure 7.5 lists common print quality problems, the likely cause, and recommended actions.

Figure 7.5

Print Quality Problems

Problem Possible Causes

Light/faint prints

Overall image is lighter than normal.

1.

Toner level low/empty

2.

Print Density adjustment set too low

3.

Damp paper stock

4.

Contaminated Bias Transfer

Roll

Corrective Actions

1.

Replace EP cartridge.

2.

Adjust Print Density (see

Chapter 6

).

3.

Replace paper stock.

4.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Blank Prints

Entire printed page is blank with no visible print.

1.

Defective EP cartridge

2.

No printable data received from computer

1.

Replace EP cartridge.

2.

Produce a Test Print (see

Chapter 6

). If the Test Print is normal, check the following:

• Interface cable between computer and printer

• Printer set up and application software

If the Test Print is blank, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-29

AUG-CH07 Page 30 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5

Print Quality Problems

(continued)

Problem Possible Causes

Background/black prints

Overall darkness or localized dark bands in the non-image areas.

1.

Defective EP cartridge

2.

Print Density adjustment set too high

3.

Contaminated Bias Transfer

Roll

4.

Defective Laser, Controller,

Fuser Assembly

Corrective Actions

1.

Replace EP cartridge.

2.

Adjust Print Density (see

Chapter 6

).

3.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

4.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox

Spot deletions

Areas of the print are extremely light or missing.

1.

Damp paper stock

2.

Defective EP cartridge

3.

Contaminated Bias Transfer

Roll

1.

Replace paper stock.

2.

Replace EP cartridge.

3.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

7-30

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 31 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5

Print Quality Problems

(continued)

Problem Possible Causes

Vertical line deletions

Localized print deletions forming narrow lines running in the direction of paper movement.

1.

Defective EP cartridge

2.

Defective paper stock, creases, folds, etc.

3.

Contaminated Bias Transfer

Roll

Corrective Actions

1.

Replace EP cartridge.

2.

Replace paper stock.

3.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Horizontal line deletions

Localized print deletions appearing as bands running across the page perpendicular to the direction of paper movement.

1.

Defective EP cartridge

2.

Defective paper stock, creases, folds, etc.

3.

Contaminated Bias Transfer

Roll

1.

Replace EP cartridge.

2.

Replace paper stock.

3.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-31

AUG-CH07 Page 32 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5

Print Quality Problems

(continued)

Problem Possible Causes

Vertical dark streaks

Black lines running across the print in the direction of paper movement.

1.

Defective EP cartridge

2.

Contaminated paper path

3.

Contaminated Bias Transfer

Roll

Corrective Actions

1.

Replace EP cartridge.

2.

Clean paper path to remove any toner accumulations.

3.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Horizontal dark streaks

Black lines running across the page perpendicular to the direction of paper movement.

1.

Defective EP cartridge

2.

Contaminated paper path

3.

Contaminated Bias Transfer

Roll

1.

Replace EP cartridge.

2.

Clean paper path to remove any toner accumulations.

3.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

7-32

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 33 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5

Print Quality Problems

(continued)

Problem

Dark spots/marks

Possible Causes

1.

Defective EP cartridge

2.

Contaminated paper path

3.

Contaminated Bias Transfer

Roll

Corrective Actions

1.

Replace EP cartridge.

2.

Clean paper path to remove any toner accumulations.

3.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Residual image

Ghost images of previous pages is produced along with the current page.

1.

Defective EP cartridge 1.

Replace EP cartridge.

If problem is not resolved, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-33

AUG-CH07 Page 34 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5

Print Quality Problems

(continued)

Problem Possible Causes

Unfused or partially fused image

The printed image is not fully fused to the paper and easily rubs off.

1.

Damp paper stock

2.

Heavy or unusual paper stock

3.

Light image density

4.

Defective Fuser Module

Corrective Actions

1.

Replace paper stock.

2.

Refer to

Chapter 2

for printer throughput capabilities.

3.

Replace EP cartridge.

4.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Skewed prints

Printed image is not parallel to the edge of the paper.

1.

Paper improperly loaded into paper tray

2.

Obstructed paper path

3.

4.

Contaminated paper path

Dirty/worn Paper Feed Rolls

1.

Check trays for proper paper loading

(see

Chapter 2

).

2.

Inspect paper path for obstructions

(torn pieces of paper, etc.).

3.

Inspect/clean paper path to remove residual toner and paper dust.

4.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

7-34

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-CH07 Page 35 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5

Print Quality Problems

(continued)

Problem Possible Causes

Image misregistration

The printed image is mispositioned on the page.

1.

Paper improperly loaded into paper tray

2.

Wrong paper size for application

Corrective Actions

1.

Check trays for proper paper loading

(see

Chapter 2

).

2.

Check paper stock and printer configuration.

3.

If problem is not resolved, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

Produce a Test Print (see

Chapter 3

)

• Fold and crease the Test Print as shown.

• Both horizontal and vertical folds should fall within plus or minus two lines.

If the pattern registers OK, the problem may be in your software application.

Damaged prints

Prints are wrinkled, creased, or torn.

1.

Poor paper condition

2.

Paper improperly loaded into paper tray

3.

Obstructed paper path

4.

Defective Fuser Module

1.

Inspect/replace paper stock.

2.

Check trays for proper paper loading

(see

Chapter 2

).

3.

Inspect paper path for obstructions

(torn pieces of paper, etc.).

4.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

C h a p t e r 7 : T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g

7-35

AUG-CH07 Page 36 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:34 AM

P r i n t Q u a l i t y P r o b l e m s

Figure 7.5

Print Quality Problems

(continued)

Problem Possible Causes

TrueRes Smoothing problems

TrueRes Smoothing is a technology that smooths the jagged edges of curved or near vertical/horizontal lines.

Produce Test Prints (see

Chapter 3

) with TrueRes switched both ON and

OFF. Inspect the TrueRes target on the Test Print.

If:

1.

TrueRes is not functional (no apparent difference between ON and

OFF setting)

1.

Failed Controller.

2.

TrueRes appears excessively dark:

Corrective Actions

1.

Replace Controller.

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

2.

Print Density set to dark/light.

2.

Adjust Print Density (see

Chapter 6

).

or

TrueRes appears insufficient

7-36

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPA Page 1 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

Appendix A

Printer and Cable

Specifications

A x i d n e p p A

4505 and 4505ps Printer Specifications

.............................

A-2

4510 and 4510ps Printer Specifications

.............................

A-4

Cable Specifications

.............................................................

A-7

Parallel Interface A-7

RS-232C Serial Interface (CCITT V.24) A-10

Data Rates A-10

Encoding A-10

Protocols A-10

Connections A-10

RS-422A Serial Interface (CCITT V.11 and X.27) A-12

Data Rates A-12

Encoding A-12

Protocols A-12

Connections A-12

Null Modem A-14

Network Interface A-14

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

A-1

AUG-APPA Page 2 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

4 5 0 5 a n d 4 5 0 5 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

4505 and

4505ps Printer

Specifications

Imaging method

Electro-Photography

Exposure system

Semiconductor laser beam (laser diode) scanning

Image resolution

600 x 600 dpi and 300 x 300 dpi

Warm up time

Less than 60 seconds after power on

Continuous print speed

Processor

5 ppm (pages per minute)

16 MHz AMD 29200 RISC

Maximum Monthly Duty Cycle

Nominal voltage

Up to 10,000 prints

220/240 V

110/115 V

Nominal frequency

Power consumption

50/60 Hz

Less than 450 W during operation; power saver mode operational after

10 minutes of not printing

Noise level

Temperature

Less than 45 dB during operation and warm-up; less than 40 dB in standby

5

°

C / 41

°

F to 35

°

C / 95

°

F during operation

Humidity

15% to 85% during operation

Dimensions

Weight

Maximum memory capacity

35.2 x 39.4 x 25.3 cm

13.9 x 15.5 x 10 inches

12 Kgs / 26.5 lbs

16 MB

A-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPA Page 3 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

4 5 0 5 a n d 4 5 0 5 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Factory-provided features

Options

2 MB printer memory

One 250-sheet universal paper tray

Multipurpose (MP) paper tray

EP (electronic printing) cartridge

Power cord (110 volt printers only)

Document Services for Printing

software diskettes

User documentation

On the 4505ps printer:

Additional

4 MB SIMM

(for a total of 6 MB)

PostScript option

4 MB SIMM

16 MB SIMM

250-sheet Base with universal tray

500-sheet Base with A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray

Paper trays (in a variety of sizes)

PostScript kit

Ethernet network interface card (XNIC-E’NET)

LocalTalk network interface card (XNIC-L’TALK)

Token Ring network interface card (XNIC-T’RING)

PCL font cards

See

Appendix D

for information about ordering options.

Note

Printable Area

See

Figure A.1 (page A-6)

for printable area dimensions. (The printer cannot print outside the printable area.)

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

A-3

AUG-APPA Page 4 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

4510 and

4510ps Printer

Specifications

Imaging method

Electro-Photography

Exposure system

Semiconductor laser beam (laser diode) scanning

Image resolution

600 x 600 dpi and 300 x 300 dpi

Warm up time

Less than 60 seconds after power on

Continuous print speed

Processor

10 ppm (pages per minute)

20 MHz AMD 29200 RISC

Maximum Monthly Duty Cycle

Nominal voltage

Up to 20,000 prints

220/240 V

110/115 V

Nominal frequency

Power consumption

50/60 Hz

Less than 450 W during operation; power saver mode operational after

10 minutes of not printing

Noise level

Temperature

Less than 50 dB during operation and warm-up; less than 40 dB in standby

5

°

C / 41

°

F to 35

°

C / 95

°

F during operation

Humidity

15% to 85% during operation

Dimensions

Weight

Maximum memory capacity

35.2 x 39.4 x 25.4 cm

13.9 x 15.5 x 10 inches

14.0 Kgs / 31 lbs

16 MB

A-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPA Page 5 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Factory-provided features

Options

2 MB printer memory

One 250-sheet universal paper tray

Multipurpose (MP) paper tray

EP (electronic printing) cartridge

Power cord (110 volt printers only)

Document Services for Printing

software diskettes

User documentation

On the 4510ps printer:

Additional

4 MB SIMM

(for a total of 6 MB)

PostScript option

4 MB SIMM

16 MB SIMM

250-sheet Base with universal tray

500-sheet Base with A4 or 8.5 x 11 (Letter) tray

Paper trays (in a variety of sizes)

PostScript kit

Ethernet network interface card (XNIC-E’NET)

LocalTalk network interface card (XNIC-L’TALK)

Token Ring network interface card (XNIC-T’RING)

PCL font cards

See

Appendix D

for information about ordering options.

Note

Printable Area

See

Figure A.1 (page A-6)

for printable area dimensions. (The printer cannot print outside the printable area.)

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

A-5

AUG-APPA Page 6 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

4 5 1 0 a n d 4 5 1 0 p s P r i n t e r S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Figure A.1

PCL and PostScript printable area dimensions

Printer Language

PCL

Paper Size

All paper sizes

Printable Area

Width

Determined by the formula: W – 8.5 mm

(or W – .33 inch) where

W = physical paper width

PostScript

A4

8.5 x 11 (Letter)

Executive

8.5 x 14 (Legal)

Com-10

DL

Monarch

Folio

A5

B5 (ISO)

C5

7.89 inches

207 mm

8.11 inches

175 mm

6.93 inches

207 mm

8.11 inches

96 mm

3.73 inches

100 mm

3.95 inches

89 mm

3.52 inches

207 mm

8.11 inches

141 mm

5.55 inches

167 mm

6.61 inches

154 mm

6.08 inches

Printable Area

Length

Determined by the formula: L – 8.5 mm

(or L – .33 inch) where

L = physical paper width

289 mm

11.36 inches

271 mm

10.67 inches

258 mm

10.17 inches

347 mm

13.67 inches

233 mm

9.17 inches

212 mm

8.33 inches

182 mm

7.17 inches

347 mm

12.67 inches

200 mm

7.89 inches

241 mm

9.53 inches

220 mm

8.68 inches

A-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPA Page 7 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Cable

Specifications

Figure A.2 shows parallel and serial interface information to help you obtain the correct printer cable.

Figure A.2

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps parallel and serial cable characteristics

Type Commonly Used for

Communication

Protocol

Printer Connector

Type

Standard Centronics

Parallel

Cable

Standard Serial

Cable

Most PC systems today

PCs and modems

Bidirectional

(Centronics standard)

RS-232C or

RS-422A

36-pin male

25-pin male

† Xerox has certified Parallel cables with these printers at a maximum of 6 feet.

‡ Xerox has certified Serial cables with these printers at a maximum of 4 feet.

Parallel Interface

Today most single-user computer systems (IBM PC and compatibles) utilize the parallel interface because it allows more data at a time to be transferred from the computer to the printer than does a serial interface. If the printer is not connected to a network, printing through the parallel interface is most desirable.

The printers support a bidirectional parallel port, compatible with the IEEE standard 1284-B, with forward transfer rates of

100 KBytes or 1 MBytes.

The FAULT signal (pin no. 32) goes true (low) under the following conditions:

• Off-line mode selected

• Cover open (interlock open)

• Paper out

• Paper jam

• Any machine fault

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

A-7

AUG-APPA Page 8 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The FAULT signal goes false (high) when all the above conditions are corrected.

The Centronics bidirectional parallel interface is designed to provide plug-to-plug compatibility with a 36 pin Amphenol

57-40360 (or equivalent) connector that connects to an

Amphenol 57-30360 (or equivalent) connector. The cable length has been certified at 6 feet, and will be the twisted pair type 22AWG -15 pairs. Pin assignment and functions for the

Centronics interface are designated in Figure A.3.

Figure A.3

Centronics connector pin assignment

Signal

Pin #

Signal Name Source

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

1

2

3

4

7

8

5

6

9

/ACK

BUSY

PE

SELECT

/AUTOFEED

N/C

GND

GND

/STROBE

DATA 0

DATA 1

DATA 2

DATA 3

DATA 4

DATA 5

DATA 6

DATA 7

HOST

BIDIRECTIONAL

BIDIRECTIONAL

BIDIRECTIONAL

BIDIRECTIONAL

BIDIRECTIONAL

BIDIRECTIONAL

BIDIRECTIONAL

BIDIRECTIONAL

PRINTER

PRINTER

PRINTER

PRINTER

HOST

- - - - - -

Function

Host Check

Data Bit 0

Data Bit 1

Data Bit 2

Data Bit 3

Data Bit 4

Data Bit 5

Data Bit 6

Data Bit 7

Printer Acknowledge

Printer Busy

Out of Paper

Printer Select

Host Busy

Not Defined

Logic GND

Chassis GND

A-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPA Page 9 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Figure A.3

Centronics connector pin assignment

(continued)

Signal

Pin #

Signal Name Source Function

23

24

25

26

27

18

19

20

21

22

28

29

30

31

32

33 - 35

36

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

+ 5V

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

/INIT

/FAULT

N/C

/SELECTIN

PRINTER

HOST

PRINTER

- - - - - -

HOST

Printer Logic High

Signal GND (

/Strobe

)

Signal GND (

Data 0

)

Signal GND (

Data 1

)

Signal GND (

Data 2

)

Signal GND (

Data 3

)

Signal GND (

Data 4

)

Signal GND (

Data 5

)

Signal GND (

Data 6

)

Signal GND (

Data 7

)

Signal Ground (

PE, SELECT, /ACK

)

Signal Ground (

BUSY, /FAULT

)

Signal Ground (

AUTOFEED, /SELECTIN, /INIT

)

Reset Signal

Machine Status

Not Defined

Select Input

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

A-9

AUG-APPA Page 10 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

RS-232C Serial

Interface

(CCITT V.24)

The RS-232C Serial Interface complies with the EIA 232C standard which defines the interconnect of Data Terminal

Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication Equipment

(DCE).

Data Rates

The user may select line speeds of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600, 19200 and 38400 baud.

Default setting is for 9600 baud

.

Encoding

Asynchronous communication in the printers supports 7 or

8-bit ASCII data. The string of data bits is encapsulated by 1

Start bit, 1 or 2 Stop bits and may have an appended Parity bit. Parity (even, odd or none), the number of stop bits and 7 or 8 bit data are selectable from the front panel UI.

Default settings are for 8 bit data with 1 stop bit and parity none

.

Protocols

Character protocols are used to regulate the flow of information between machine and host. The software handshaking protocol of XON/XOFF, Robust XON/XOFF, and DTR Polarity are available – DTR provides the hardware handshaking.

The default setting is for Robust XON/XOFF

.

Connections

The connector for the RS-232 interface is the 25 pin “D” Shell type. The use of short cables for interconnect is recommended. Cable length has been certified at 4 feet.

A-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPA Page 11 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The interface signals and their associated pin assignments are identified in the Figure A.4.

Figure A.4

Pin assignment for RS-232C

Signal Name Pin #

RS-232C

Function

Chassis GND

Transmitted Data

Received Data

Request to Send

Clear to Send

Data Set Ready

Signal GND

Carrier Detect

N/C

Send Data Noninverted

Receive Data Noninverted

Send Data inverted

N/C

Receive Data Inverted

Data Terminal Ready

N/C

1

2

3

4

7

8

5

6

9, 10, 12

11

13

14

15, 17 – 19

16

20

21 – 25

GND

Data

Data

Control

Control

Control

GND

Control

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

Control

- - - - - -

Direction

- - - - - -

From Printer

To Printer

From Printer

To Printer

To Printer

- - - - - -

To Printer

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

From Printer

- - - - - -

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

A-11

AUG-APPA Page 12 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

RS-422A Serial

Interface (CCITT

V.11 and X.27)

The RS-422A Serial Interface is hardware compatible with the EIA RS-422 standard which defines the interconnect of

Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication

Equipment (DCE).

Data Rates

The user may select line speeds of 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800,

9600, 19200 and 38400 baud.

Default setting is for 9600 baud

.

Encoding

Asynchronous communication in the printers supports 7 or

8-bit ASCII data. The string of data bits is encapsulated by 1

Start bit, 1 or 2 Stop bits and may have an appended Parity bit. Parity (even, odd or none), the number of stop bits and 7 or 8 bit data are selectable from the front panel UI.

Default settings are for 8 bit data with 1 stop bit and parity none

.

Protocols

XON/XOFF provides the software handshaking on the

RS-422 interface.

Robust XON/XOFF is the default

.

Connections

The connector for the RS-422A interface is the 25 pin “D”

Shell type. The use of short cables for interconnect is recommended. Cable length has been certified at 4 feet.

A-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPA Page 13 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

The interface signals and their associated pin assignments are identified in the Figure A.5.

Figure A.5

Pin assignment for RS-422A

Signal Name Pin #

RS-422A

Function

Chassis GND

Transmitted Data

Received Data

Request to Send

Clear to Send

Data Set Ready

Signal GND

Carrier Detect

N/C

Send Data Noninverted

Receive Data Noninverted

Send Data inverted

N/C

Receive Data Inverted

Data Terminal Ready

N/C

1

2

3

4

7

8

5

6

9, 10, 12

11

13

14

15, 17 – 19

16

20

21 – 25

GND

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

GND

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

Data

Data

Data

- - - - - -

Data

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

Direction

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

From Printer

To Printer

From Printer

- - - - - -

To Printer

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

A p p e n d i x A : P r i n t e r a n d C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

A-13

AUG-APPA Page 14 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:07 PM

C a b l e S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Null Modem

A null modem is a device that eliminates both a modem and a telephone line. When the printers are used with an asynchronous serial interface connected to a DTE host (such as a PC-compatible), a modem, modem eliminator, or a null modem is required. Figure A.6 shows null modem wiring.

Figure A.6

Null Modem wiring

Network Interface

Network interface communication is the most common for enabling multiple users to print from a host system.

For

network interface

cables, refer to your network software documentation.

A-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

Appendix B

Printer Commands

(Escape Sequences)

B x i d n e p p A

Xerox-Unique Settings

.........................................................

B-2

PCL Printer Commands

.........................................................

B-3

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands

.................................

B-21

Control Codes

.....................................................................

B-25

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-1

AUG-APPB Page 26 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

X e r o x - U n i q u e S e t t i n g s

B-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

PCL Printer

Commands

PCL printer commands—also called

escape sequences

—are used by software applications to

control how fonts and graphics are printed on the page

. Figure B.1 lists the PCL printer commands for the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers.

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

Function Parameter Command Decimal Value

JOB CONTROL COMMANDS

Hexadecimal Value

Universal Exit

Language (ULE)

Reset

Number Of

Copies

# of Copies

Long Edge (Left)

Offset

Registration

# of Decipoints

(1/720”)

Short Edge

(Top) Offset

Registration

# of Decipoints

(1/720”)

Unit Of

Measure

# = Number of units per inch

Paper Source

E

C

%-12345X 027 037 045 049 050

051 052 053 088

E

C

E

E

C

&l#X

027 069

027 038 108 # ... # 088

1B 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35

58

1B 45

1B 26 6C # ... # 58

E

C

&l#U

E

C

&l#Z

E

C

&u#D

Reset

027 038 108 # ... # 085 1B 26 6C # ... # 55

027 038 108 # ... # 090 1B 26 6C # ... # 5A

027 038 117 # ... # 068 1B 26 75 # ... # 44

Eject Page

Main Paper

Source (Standard)

Manual Feed (MP)

Manual Envelope

Feed (MP)

Alternate Paper

Source (Lower)

PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS

Page Length and Size

E

C

&l0H

E

C

&l1H

027 038 108 048 072

027 038 108 049 072

E

C

&l2H

E

C

&l3H

E

C

&l4H

027 038 108 050 072

027 038 108 051 072

027 038 108 052 072

1B 26 6C 30 48

1B 26 6C 31 48

1B 26 6C 32 48

1B 26 6C 33 48

1B 26 6C 34 48

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-3

AUG-APPB Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function

Page Size

Parameter

Executive

Letter

Legal

A4

Command

E

C

&l1A

E

C

&l2A

E

C

&l3A

E

C

&l26A

Page Length

A5

Folio

Monarch

COM 10

DL

C5

B5 (ISO)

# of Lines

(5-128)

E

C

&l70A

E

C

&l71A

E

C

&l80A

E

C

&l81A

E

C

&l90A

E

C

&l91A

E

C

&l100A

E

C

&l#P

Decimal Value

027 038 108 049 065

027 038 108 050 065

027 038 108 051 065

027 038 108 050 054

065

027 038 108 050 048

048 048 065

027 038 108 051 048

048 049 065

027 038 108 056 048

065

027 038 108 056 049

065

027 038 108 057 048

065

027 038 108 057 049

065

027 038 108 049 048

048 065

027 038 108 #...# 080

Orientation

Orientation

Print Direction

Portrait

Landscape

Reverse Portrait

Reverse Landscape

E

C

&l0O

E

C

&l1O

E

C

&l2O

E

C

&l3O

E

C

&a#P # Degrees of

Rotation

(counterclockwise. 90

° increments only)

Hexadecimal Value

1B 26 6C 31 41

1B 26 6C 32 41

1B 26 6C 33 41

1B 26 6C 32 36 41

1B 26 6C 32 30 30 30 41

1B 26 6C 33 30 30 31 41

1B 26 6C 38 30 41

1B 26 6C 38 31 41

1B 26 6C 39 30 41

1B 26 6C 39 31 41

1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41

1B 26 6C #...# 050

027 038 108 048 079

027 038 108 049 079

027 038 108 050 079

027 038 108 051 079

1B 26 6C 30 4F

1B 26 6C 31 4F

1B 26 6C 32 4F

1B 26 6C 33 4F

027 038 097 # ... # 080 1B 26 61 # ... # 50

B-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function

Top Margin

Text Length

Left Margin

Right Margin

Clear

Horizontal

Margins

Parameter

# of Lines

# of Lines

# of Columns

# of Columns

Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value

Margins and Text Length

E

C

&l#E

E

C

&l#F

E

C

&a#L

E

C

&a#M

E

C

9

027 038 108 # ... # 069 1B 26 6C # ... # 45

027 038 108 # ... # 070 1B 26 6C # ... # 46

027 038 097 # ... # 076 1B 26 61 # ... # 4C

027 038 097 # ... # 077 1B 26 61 # ... # 4D

027 057 1B 39

Perforation Skip Disable

Enable

Horizontal

Motion Index

(HMI)

# of 1/120”

Increments

Perforation Skip Mode

E

C

&l0L

E

C

&l1L

027 038 108 048 076

027 038 108 049 076

Horizontal Column Spacing

E

C

&k#H

1B 26 6C 30 4C

1B 26 6C 31 4C

027 038 107 # ... # 072 1B 26 6B # ... # 48

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-5

AUG-APPB Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value

Vertical Line Spacing

E

C

&l#C 027 038 108 # ... # 067 1B 26 6C # ... # 43 Vertical Motion

Index (VMI)

Line Spacing

(Lines per inch)

# of 1/48”

Increments

1 line/inch

2 lines/inch

3 lines/inch

4 lines/inch

6 lines/inch

8 lines/inch

12 lines/inch

16 lines/inch

24 lines/inch

48 lines/inch

E

C

&l1D

E

C

&l2D

E

C

&l3D

E

C

&l4D

E

C

&l6D

E

C

&l8D

E

C

&l12D

027 038 108 049 068

027 038 108 050 068

027 038 108 051 068

027 038 108 052 068

027 038 108 054 068

027 038 108 056 068

027 038 108 049 050

068

E

C

&l16D

E

C

&l24D

027 038 108 049 054

068

027 038 108 050 052

068

E

C

&l48D 027 038 108 052 056

068

CURSOR POSITIONING

1B 26 6C 31 44

1B 26 6C 32 44

1B 26 6C 33 44

1B 26 6C 34 44

1B 26 6C 36 44

1B 26 6C 38 44

1B 26 6C 31 32 44

1B 26 6C 31 36 44

1B 26 6C 32 34 44

1B 26 6C 34 38 44

Vertical Position # of Rows

# of Units

Horizontal

Position

# of Decipoints

# of Columns

# of Units

# of Decipoints

Half Line Feed

Vertical and Horizontal

E

C

&a#R

E

C

*p#Y

E

C

&a#V

E

C

&a#C

E

C

*p#X

E

C

&a#H

E

C

=

027 038 097 # ... # 082 1B 26 61 # ... # 52

027 042 112 # ... # 089 1B 2A 70 # ... # 59

027 038 097 # ... # 086 1B 26 61 # ... # 56

027 038 097 # ... # 067 1B 26 61 # ... # 43

027 042 112 # ... # 088 1B 2A 70 # ... # 58

027 038 097 # ... # 072 1B 26 61 # ... # 48

027 061 1B 3D

B-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function

Line

Termination

Parameter Command Decimal Value

End-of-Line Termination

E

C

&k0G 027 038 107 048 071 CR=CR; LF=LF;

FF=FF

CR=CR+LF;

LF=LF; FF=FF

CR=CR;

LF=CR+LF;

FF=CR+FF

CR=CR+LF;

LF=CR+LF;

FF=CR+FF

E

C

&k1G

E

C

&k2G

E

C

&k3G

027 038 107 049 071

027 038 107 050 071

027 038 107 051 071

Push/Pop

Position

Push

Pop

Push/Pop Position

E

C

&f0S

E

C

&f1S

027 038 102 048 083

027 038 102 049 083

FONT SELECTION

Primary Symbol

Set

Symbol Set Selection

E

C

(0D 027 040 048 068 ISO 60:

Norwegian 1

ISO 4: United

Kingdom

Windows 3.1

Latin 2

ISO 69: French

ISO 21: German

ISO 15: Italian

Microsoft

Publishing

DeskTop

PS Text

E

C

(1E

E

C

(9E

E

C

(1F

E

C

(1G

E

C

(0I

E

C

(6J

E

C

(7J

E

C

(10J

027 040 049 069

027 040 057 069

027 040 049 070

027 040 049 071

027 040 048 073

027 040 054 074

027 040 055 074

027 040 049 048 074

Hexadecimal Value

1B 26 6B 30 47

1B 26 6B 31 47

1B 26 6B 32 47

1B 26 6B 33 47

1B 26 66 30 53

1B 26 66 31 53

1B 28 30 44

1B 28 31 45

1B 28 39 45

1B 28 31 46

1B 28 31 47

1B 28 30 49

1B 28 36 4A

1B 28 37 4A

1B 28 31 30 4A

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-7

AUG-APPB Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter

MC Text

Ventura

International

Ventura US

Wingdings

Command

E

C

(12J

E

C

(13J

E

C

(14J

E

C

(579L

PS Math

Ventura Math

Math-8

Symbol

ISO 8859-1

(ECMA-94) Latin 1

E

C

(5M

E

C

(6M

E

C

(8M

E

C

(19M

E

C

(0N

ISO 8859-2 Latin 2

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5

ISO 11: Swedish

ISO 17: Spanish

Windows 3.1

Latin 5

E

C

(2N

E

C

(5N

E

C

(0S

E

C

(2S

E

C

(5T

PC Turkish

ISO 6: ASCII

Legal

Roman-8

E

C

(9T

E

C

(0U

E

C

(1U

E

C

(8U

E

C

(9U Windows 3.0

Latin 1

PC-8

PC-8 D/N

PC 850

E

C

(10U

E

C

(11U

E

C

(12U

Decimal Value

027 040 049 050 074

027 040 049 051 074

027 040 049 052 074

027 040 053 055 057

076

027 040 053 077

027 040 054 077

027 040 056 077

027 040 049 057 077

027 040 048 078

027 040 050 078

027 040 053 078

027 040 048 083

027 040 050 083

027 040 053 084

027 040 057 084

027 040 048 085

027 040 049 085

027 040 056 085

027 040 057 085

027 040 049 048 085

027 040 049 049 085

027 040 049 050 085

Hexadecimal Value

1B 28 31 32 4A

1B 28 31 33 4A

1B 28 31 34 4A

1B 28 35 37 39 4C

1B 28 35 4D

1B 28 36 4D

1B 28 38 4D

1B 28 31 39 4D

1B 28 30 4E

1B 28 32 4E

1B 28 35 4E

1B 28 30 53

1B 28 32 53

1B 28 35 54

1B 28 39 54

1B 28 30 55

1B 28 31 55

1B 28 38 55

1B 28 39 55

1B 28 31 30 55

1B 28 31 31 55

1B 28 31 32 55

B-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter

Pi Font

PC-852

Command

E

C

(15U

E

C

(17U

E

C

(19U

Decimal Value

027 040 049 053 085

027 040 049 055 085

Hexadecimal Value

1B 28 31 35 55

1B 28 31 37 55

Windows 3.1

Latin 1 (ANSI)

027 040 049 057 085 1B 28 31 39 55

Spacing

Primary Spacing Fixed

Proportional

E

C

(s0P

E

C

(s1P

027 040 115 048 080

027 040 115 049 080

Pitch

1B 28 73 30 50

1B 28 73 31 50

Primary Pitch # Characters/inch

Set Pitch Mode 10.0

E

C

(s#H

E

C

&k0S

E

C

&k2S

027 040 115 # ... # 072 1B 28 73 # ... # 48

027 038 107 048 083 1B 26 6B 30 53

Compressed

(16.5-16.7)

Elite (12.0)

Primary Height # Points

Primary Style

E

C

&k4S 027 038 107 052 083

Point Size

E

C

(s#V

1B 26 6B 34 53

027 040 115 # ... # 086 1B 28 73 # ... # 56

Style

Upright (Solid)

Italic

Condensed

Condensed Italic

Compressed (Extra

Condensed)

E

C

(s0S

E

C

(s1S

E

C

(s4S

E

C

(s5S

E

C

(s8S

Expanded

E

C

(s24S

027 040 115 048 083

027 040 115 049 083

027 040 115 052 083

027 040 115 053 083

027 040 115 056 083

1B 28 73 30 53

1B 28 73 31 53

1B 28 73 34 53

1B 28 73 35 53

1B 28 73 38 53

1B 28 73 32 34 53

Outline

E

C

(s32S

027 038 107 050 083

027 040 115 050 052

083

027 040 115 051 050

083

1B 26 6B 32 53

1B 28 73 33 32 53

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-9

AUG-APPB Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function

Primary Font

Stroke Weight

Parameter

Inline

Shadowed

Outline Shadowed

E

C

(s160S

Ultra Thin

Extra Thin

Thin

Extra Light

Light

Demi Light

Semi Light

Medium (book or text)

027 040 115 049 054

048 083

E

C

(s-7B

Stroke Weight

027 040 115 045 055

066

E

C

(s-6B 027 040 115 045 054

066

E

C

(s-5B 027 040 115 045 053

066

E

C

(s-4B 027 040 115 045 052

066

E

C

(s-3B 027 040 115 045 051

066

E

C

(s-2B 027 040 115 045 050

066

E

C

(s-1B 027 040 115 045 049

066

E

C

(s0B 027 040 115 048 066

Semi Bold

Demi Bold

Bold

Extra Bold

Black

Extra Black

Ultra Black

Command

E

C

(s64S

E

C

(s128S

E

C

(s1B

E

C

(s2B

E

C

(s3B

E

C

(s4B

E

C

(s5B

E

C

(s6B

E

C

(s7B

Decimal Value

027 040 115 054 052

083

027 040 115 049 050

056 083

027 040 115 049 066

027 040 115 050 066

027 040 115 051 066

027 040 115 052 066

027 040 115 053 066

027 040 115 054 066

027 040 115 055 066

Hexadecimal Value

1B 28 73 36 34 53

1B 28 73 31 32 38 53

1B 28 73 31 36 30 53

1B 28 73 2D 37 42

1B 28 73 2D 36 42

1B 28 73 2D 35 42

1B 28 73 2D 34 42

1B 28 73 2D 33 42

1B 28 73 2D 32 42

1B 28 73 2D 31 42

1B 28 73 30 42

1B 28 73 31 42

1B 28 73 32 42

1B 28 73 33 42

1B 28 73 34 42

1B 28 73 35 42

1B 28 73 36 42

1B 28 73 37 42

B-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter Command Decimal Value

Typeface Family LinePrinter

Albertus

Antique Olive

Clarendon

Coronet

Courier

Garamond

Antiqua

Letter Gothic

Marigold

CG Omega

CG Times

Univers

Arial

Times New Roman

Symbol

Primary Typeface Family

E

C

(s0T

E

C

(s4362T

027 040 115 048 084

027 040 115 052 051

054 050 084

E

C

(s4168T 027 040 115 052 049

054 056 084

E

C

(s4140T 027 040 115 052 049

052 048 084

E

C

(s4116T 027 040 115 052 049

049 054 084

E

C

(s4099T 027 040 115 052 048

057 057 084

E

C

(s4197T 027 040 115 052 049

057 055 084

E

C

(s4102T 027 040 115 052 049

048 050 084

E

C

(s4297T 027 040 115 052 050

057 055 084

E

C

(s4113T 027 040 115 052 049

049 051 084

E

C

(s4101T 027 040 115 052 049

048 049 084

E

C

(s4148T 027 040 115 052 049

052 056 084

E

C

(s16602T 027 040 115 049 054

054 048 050 084

E

C

(s16901T 027 040 115 049 054

057 048 049 084

E

C

(s16686T 027 040 115 049 054

054 056 054 084

Hexadecimal Value

1B 28 73 30 54

1B 28 73 34 33 36 32 54

1B 28 73 34 31 36 38 54

1B 28 73 34 31 34 30 54

1B 28 73 34 31 31 36 54

1B 28 73 34 30 39 39 54

1B 28 73 34 31 39 37 54

1B 28 73 34 31 30 32 54

1B 28 73 34 32 39 37 54

1B 28 73 34 31 31 33 54

1B 28 73 34 31 30 31 54

1B 28 73 34 31 34 38 54

1B 28 73 31 36 36 30 32

54

1B 28 73 31 36 39 30 31

54

1B 28 73 31 36 36 38 36

54

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-11

AUG-APPB Page 12 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function

Font Default

Underline

Transparent

Print Data

Parameter

Wingdings

Primary Font

Secondary Font

Enable Fixed

Enable Floating

Disable

# of Bytes

Command

E

C

(s31402T

Decimal Value

027 040 115 051 049

052 048 050 084

Hexadecimal Value

1B 28 73 33 31 34 30 32

54

Font Default

E

C

(3@

E

C

)3@

027 040 051 064

027 041 051 064

Underline

E

C

&d0D

E

C

&d3D

E

C

&d@

027 038 100 048 068

027 038 100 051 068

027 038 100 064

Transparent Print

1B 28 33 40

1B 29 33 40

1B 26 64 30 44

1B 26 64 33 44

1B 26 64 40

E

C

&p#X[Data] 027 038 112 # ... # 088 1B 26 70 # ... # 58

Assign Font ID

Font and

Character

Control

Font ID #

Delete all Fonts

FONT MANAGEMENT

E

C

*c#D

E

C

*c0F

E

C

*c1F

027 042 099 # ... # 068 1B 2A 63 # ... # 44

027 042 099 048 070

027 042 099 049 070

1B 2A 63 30 46

1B 2A 63 31 46 Delete all temporary fonts

Delete last font ID specified

E

C

*c2F

Delete last character specified

E

C

*c3F

027 042 099 050 070

027 042 099 051 070

1B 2A 63 32 46

1B 2A 63 33 46

Make font temporary

E

C

*c4F 027 042 099 052 070 1B 2A 63 34 46

Make font permanent

E

C

*c5F 027 042 099 053 070 1B 2A 63 35 46

Copy/Assign the currently invoked font as temporary

E

C

*c6F 027 042 099 054 070 1B 2A 63 36 46

B-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 13 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value

Set Symbol Set ID #

Define Symbol

Set

# of Bytes

Soft Symbol Set Management / Creation

E

C

*c#R 027 042 099 # ... # 082 1B 2A 63 # ... # 52

E

C

(f#W[Data] 027 040 102 # ... # 087 1B 28 66 # ... # 57

Symbol Set

Control

Delete all symbol sets

E

C

*c0S 027 042 099 048 083 1B 2A 63 30 53

Delete all temporary symbol sets

E

C

*c1S 027 042 099 049 083 1B 2A 63 31 53

Delete current soft symbol set (last ID

#)

E

C

*c2S 027 042 099 050 083 1B 2A 63 32 53

Make current soft symbol set temporary

E

C

*c4S 027 042 099 052 083 1B 2A 63 34 53

Make current soft symbol set permanent

E

C

*c5S 027 042 099 053 083 1B 2A 63 35 53

Select Font

(with ID #)

ID # primary font

ID # secondary font

Font Selection by ID Number

E

C

(#X

E

C

)#X

027 040 # ... # 088

027 041 # ... # 088

# of bytes

1B 28 # ... # 58

1B 29 # ... # 58

SOFT FONT CREATION

E

C

)s#W[Data] 027 041 115 # ... # 087 1B 29 73 # ... # 57 Font Descriptor

(font header)

Download character

# of bytes

E

C

(s#W[Data] 027 040 115 # ... # 087 1B 28 73 # ... # 57

Character code Character code #

(decimal)

E

C

*c#E 027 042 099 # ... # 069 1B 2A 63 # ... # 45

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-13

AUG-APPB Page 14 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter Command

GRAPHICS

Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value

Raster

Resolution

75 dots/inch

100 dots/inch

150 dots/inch

200 dots/inch

300 dots/inch

600 dots/inch

Raster Graphics

Presentation

Follows orientation

Follows physical page

E

C

*r3F

Start Raster

Graphics

Left Raster

Graphics Margin

E

C

*r0A

Current Cursor

Raster Y Offset # of Raster Lines of vertical movement

Set Raster

Compression

Mode (Method)

E

C

*r1A

E

C

*b#Y

Unencoded

Run-Length

Encoded

E

C

*b0M

E

C

*b1M

Tagged Image File

Format

Delta Row

E

C

*b2M

E

C

*b3M

Raster Graphics

E

C

*t75R 027 042 116 055 053

082

E

C

*t100R 027 042 116 049 048

048 082

E

C

*t150R 027 042 116 049 053

048 082

E

C

*t200R 027 042 116 050 048

048 082

E

C

*t300R 027 042 116 051 048

048 082

E

C

*t600R 027 042 116 054 048

048 082

E

C

*r0F 027 042 114 048 070

027 042 114 051 070

027 042 114 048 065

1B 2A 74 37 35 52

1B 2A 74 31 30 30 52

1B 2A 74 31 35 30 52

1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52

1B 2A 74 33 30 30 52

1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52

1B 2A 72 30 46

1B 2A 72 33 46

1B 2A 72 30 41

027 042 114 049 065 1B 2A 72 31 41

027 042 098 # ... # 089 1B 2A 62 # ... # 59

027 042 098 048 077

027 042 098 049 077

027 042 098 050 077

027 042 098 051 077

1B 2A 62 30 4D

1B 2A 62 31 4D

1B 2A 62 32 4D

1B 2A 62 33 4D

B-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 15 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter Command

E

C

*b5M Adaptive compression

# of Bytes Transfer Raster

Data by row

End Raster

Graphics

Raster Height

Raster Width

Old version preferred

# Raster Rows

# Pixels of the

Specified

Resolution

]

E

C

*b#W[Data

E

C

*rB

E

C

*rC

E

C

*r#T

E

C

*r#S

Decimal Value

027 042 098 053 077

Hexadecimal Value

1B 2A 62 35 4D

027 042 098 # ... # 087 1B 2A 62 # ... # 57

027 042 114 066

027 042 114 067

1B 2A 72 42

1B 2A 72 43

027 042 114 # ... # 084 1B 2A 72 # ... # 54

027 042 114 # ... # 083 1B 2A 72 # ... # 53

Select Current

Pattern

THE PRINT MODEL

Imaging

E

C

*v0T 027 042 118 048 084 1B 2A 76 30 54

Source

Transparency

Mode

Pattern

Transparency

Mode

Solid Black

(default)

Solid White

HP-defined

Shading Pattern

HP-defined

Cross-Hatched

Pattern

User-defined pattern

Transparent

Opaque

Transparent

Opaque

E

C

*v1T

E

C

*v2T

E

C

*v3T

E

C

*v4T

E

C

*v0N

E

C

*v1N

E

C

*v0O

E

C

*v1O

027 042 118 049 084

027 042 118 050 084

027 042 118 051 084

027 042 118 052 084

027 042 118 048 078

027 042 118 049 078

027 042 118 048 079

027 042 118 049 079

1B 2A 76 31 54

1B 2A 76 32 54

1B 2A 76 33 54

1B 2A 76 34 54

1B 2A 76 30 4E

1B 2A 76 31 4E

1B 2A 76 30 4F

1B 2A 76 31 4F

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-15

AUG-APPB Page 16 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value

Rectangle

Width

(Horizontal Size)

# of dots

# of decipoints

Rectangle

Height

(Vertical Size)

Fill Rectangular

Area

Pattern ID

Shading

# of dots

# of decipoints

Solid Black

Erase (solid white fill)

Shaded Fill

Cross-hatched Fill

User-Defined

Current Pattern

% of Shading or

Type of Pattern or

User Pattern ID

2% Gray

10% Gray

E

C

*c2P

E

C

*c3P

E

C

*c4P

E

C

*c5P

E

C

*c#G

E

C

E

C

*c2G

*c10G

15% Gray

Rectangle Dimensions

E

C

*c#A

E

C

*c#H

027 042 099 # ... # 065 1B 2A 63 # ... # 41

027 042 099 # ... # 072 1B 2A 63 # ... # 48

E

C

*c#B

E

C

*c#V

E

C

*c0P

E

C

*c1P

027 042 099 # ... # 066 1B 2A 63 # ... # 42

027 042 099 # ... # 086 1B 2A 63 # ... # 56

027 042 099 048 080

027 042 099 049 080

1B 2A 63 30 50

1B 2A 63 31 50

E

C

*c15G

027 042 099 050 080

027 042 099 051 080

027 042 099 052 080

027 042 099 053 080 1B 2A 63 35 50

027 042 099 # ... # 071 1B 2A 63 # ... # 47

027 042 099 050 071

027 042 099 049 048

071

027 042 099 049 053

071

1B 2A 63 32 50

1B 2A 63 33 50

1B 2A 63 34 50

1B 2A 63 32 47

1B 2A 63 31 30 47

1B 2A 63 31 35 47

30% Gray

E

C

*c30G 1B 2A 63 33 30 47

45% Gray

70% Gray

90% Gray

E

C

*c45G

E

C

*c70G

E

C

*c90G

027 042 099 051 048

071

027 042 099 052 053

071

027 042 099 055 048

071

027 042 099 057 048

071

1B 2A 63 34 35 47

1B 2A 63 37 30 47

1B 2A 63 39 30 47

B-16

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 17 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function

Pattern

Define Pattern

User-Defined

Pattern Control

Set Pattern

Reference

Point

Parameter

100% Gray

1 Horiz. Line

2 Vert. Lines

3 Diagonal Lines

4 Diagonal Lines

5 Square Grid

6 Diagonal Grid

E

C

*c1G

E

C

*c2G

E

C

*c3G

E

C

*c4G

E

C

*c5G

E

C

*c6G

027 042 099 049 071

027 042 099 050 071

027 042 099 051 071

027 042 099 052 071

027 042 099 053 071

027 042 099 054 071

1B 2A 63 31 47

1B 2A 63 32 47

1B 2A 63 33 47

1B 2A 63 34 47

1B 2A 63 35 47

1B 2A 63 36 47

USER-DEFINED PATTERN / MANAGEMENT CREATION

# of bytes

Delete all patterns

Delete all temporary patterns

Delete current pattern

Make pattern temporary

Make pattern permanent

Rotate with orientation

Follow physical page

Command

E

C

*c100G

]

E

C

*c#W[Data

E

C

*c0Q

E

C

*c1Q

E

C

*c2Q

E

C

*c4Q

E

C

*c5Q

E

C

*p0R

E

C

*p1R

Decimal Value

027 042 099 049 048

048 071

Hexadecimal Value

1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47

027 042 099 # ... # 087 1B 2A 63 # ... # 57

027 042 099 048 081

027 042 099 049 081

027 042 099 050 081

027 042 099 052 081

027 042 099 053 081

027 042 112 048 082

027 042 112 049 082

1B 2A 63 30 51

1B 2A 63 31 51

1B 2A 63 32 51

1B 2A 63 34 51

1B 2A 63 35 51

1B 2A 70 30 52

1B 2A 70 31 52

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-17

AUG-APPB Page 18 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function

Macro ID

Macro Control

Set Status

Readback

Location Type

Parameter

Macro ID #

Start Macro Def.

Stop Macro Def.

Execute Macro

Call Macro

Enable Overlay

Disable Overlay

Delete Macros

Delete All Temp.

Macros

Delete Macro ID

Make Temporary

Make Permanent

Invalid Location

Command

E

C

&f#Y

E

C

&f0X

E

C

&f1X

E

C

&f2X

E

C

&f3X

E

C

&f4X

E

C

&f5X

E

C

&f6X

E

C

&f7X

E

C

&f8X

E

C

&f9X

E

C

&f10X

MACROS

Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value

027 038 102 # ... # 089 1B 26 66 # ... # 59

027 038 102 048 088

027 038 102 049 088

027 038 102 050 088

1B 26 66 30 58

1B 26 66 31 58

1B 26 66 32 58

027 038 102 051 088

027 038 102 052 088

027 038 102 053 088

027 038 102 054 088

027 038 102 055 088

1B 26 66 33 58

1B 26 66 34 58

1B 26 66 35 58

1B 26 66 36 58

1B 26 66 37 58

027 038 102 056 088

027 038 102 057 088

027 038 102 049 048

088

STATUS READBACK

E

C

*s0T 027 042 115 048 084

1B 26 66 38 58

1B 26 66 39 58

1B 26 66 31 30 58

1B 2A 73 30 54

Currently Selected

All Locations

Internal

Downloaded

Cartridge

User-Installed

ROM (SIMMs)

E

C

*s1T

E

C

*s2T

E

C

*s3T

E

C

*s4T

E

C

*s5T

E

C

*s7T

027 042 115 049 084

027 042 115 050 084

027 042 115 051 084

027 042 115 052 084

027 042 115 053 084

027 042 115 055 084

1B 2A 73 31 54

1B 2A 73 32 54

1B 2A 73 33 54

1B 2A 73 34 54

1B 2A 73 35 54

1B 2A 73 37 54

B-18

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 19 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function

Set Status

Readback

Location Unit

Parameter

All entities of the

Location Type

Entity 1 or

Temporary

Entity 2 or

Permanent

Entity 3

Command

E

C

*s0U

E

C

*s1U

E

C

*s2U

Decimal Value

027 042 115 048 085

027 042 115 049 085

027 042 115 050 085

Hexadecimal Value

1B 2A 73 30 55

1B 2A 73 31 55

1B 2A 73 32 55

Inquire Status

Readback Entity

Entity 4

Font

Macro

User-defined

Pattern

Symbol Set

E

C

*s3U

E

C

*s4U

E

C

*s0I

E

C

*s1I

E

C

*s2I

027 042 115 051 085

027 042 115 052 085

027 042 115 048 073

027 042 115 049 073

027 042 115 050 073

1B 2A 73 33 55

1B 2A 73 34 55

1B 2A 73 30 49

1B 2A 73 31 49

1B 2A 73 32 49

Font Extended

Flush All Pages Flush All complete pages

Flush All Page

Data

— Free Memory

Space

Echo

End-Of-Line

Wrap

Display

Functions

E

C

*s3I

E

C

*s4I

E

C

&r0F

E

C

&r1F

E

C

*s1M

027 042 115 051 073

027 042 115 052 073

027 038 114 048 070

027 038 114 049 070

027 042 115 049 077

1B 2A 73 33 49

1B 2A 73 34 49

1B 26 72 30 46

1B 26 72 31 46

1B 2A 73 31 4D

# = Echo value

(-32767 to 32767)

E

C

*s#X

Enabled

Disabled

ON

OFF

027 042 115 # ... # 088 1B 2A 73 # ... # 58

PROGRAMMING HINTS

E

C

&s0C

E

C

&s1C

E

C

Y

E

C

Z

027 038 115 048 067

027 038 115 049 067

027 089

027 090

1B 26 73 30 43

1B 26 73 31 43

1B 59

1B 5A

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-19

AUG-APPB Page 20 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

P C L P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.1

PCL printer commands

(continued)

Function Parameter Command Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value

PCL VECTOR GRAPHICS SWITCHING/SET-UP PICTURE FRAME

Enter PCL Mode Use previous PCL cursor position

E

C

%0A 027 037 048 065 1B 25 30 41

E

C

%1A 027 037 049 065 1B 25 31 41 Use current

HP-GL/2 pen position for cursor position

Enter HP-GL/2

Mode

Use Previous

HP-GL/2 pen position

E

C

%0B 027 037 048 066 1B 25 30 42

Use current PCL cursor position

E

C

%1B 027 037 049 066 1B 25 31 42

HP-GL/2 Plot

Horizontal Size

Horizontal size in inches

E

C

*c#K 027 042 099 # ... # 075 1B 2A 63 # ... # 4B

HP-GL/2 Plot

Vertical Size

Vertical size in inches

E

C

*c#L 027 042 099 # ... # 076 1B 2A 63 # ... # 4C

Set Picture

Frame Anchor

Point

Set anchor point to cursor position

E

C

*c0T 027 042 099 048 084 1B 2A 63 30 54

Picture Frame

Horizontal Size

Decipoints

E

C

*c#X 027 042 099 # ... # 088 1B 2A 63 # ... # 58

Picture Frame

Vertical Size

Decipoints

E

C

*c#Y 027 042 099 # ... # 089 1B 2A 63 # ... # 59

B-20

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 21 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

HP-GL/2

Context

Printer

Commands

In Figure B.2, parameters in brackets [] are optional.

Figure B.2

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands

Command Mnemonic

Enter PCL Mode

Reset

Primary Font

Secondary Font

Scalable Or Bitmapped Fonts

Parameters

DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS

Esc%#A

EscE

0 - Retain previous PCL cursor position

1 - Use current HP-GL/2 pen position

None

F1

FN

SB

Font_ID

Font_ID

0 - Scalable fonts only

1 - Bitmapped fonts allowed

PALETTE EXTENSIONS

Transparency Mode

Screened Vectors

Arc Absolute

Arc Relative

Absolute Arc Three Point

Bezier Absolute

TR 0 - Off (opaque)

1 - On (transparent)

SV [screen_type[,shading[,index]]]

VECTOR GROUP

AA

AR

AT

BZ x_center, y_center, sweep_angle [,chord_angle]; x_increment, y_increment, sweep-angle

[,chord_angle]; x_inter, y_inter, x_end, y_end [,chord_angle]; x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt . . .

[x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt];

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-21

AUG-APPB Page 22 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.2

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands

(continued)

Command

Bezier Relative

Plot Absolute

Plot Relative

Pen Down

Pen Up

Relative Arc Three Point

Polyline Encoded

Mnemonic

BR

PA

PR

PD

PU

Parameters

x1_control_pt_increments, y1_control_pt_increments, x2_control_pt_increments, y2_control_pt_increments x3_control_pt_increments, y3_control_pt_increments . . .

[x1_control_pt_increments, y1_control_pt_increments, x2_control_pt_increments, y2_control_pt_increments, x3_control_pt_increments, y3_control_pt_increments];

[x,y . . . [,x,y]];

[x,y . . . [,x,y]];

[x,y . . . [,x,y]];

[x,y . . . [,x,y]];

RT

PE x_incr_inter, y_incr_inter, x_incr_end, y_incr_end

[,chord_angle];

[flag[val]|coord_pair . . . [flag[val]|coord_pair]];

POLYGON GROUP

Circle

Fill Rectangle Absolute

Fill Rectangle Relative

Edge Rectangle Absolute

Edge Rectangle Relative

Fill Wedge

Edge Wedge

Polygon Mode

Fill Polygon

Edge Polygon

CI

RA

EW

PM

FP

RR

EA

ER

WG

EP radius [,chord_angle]; x_coordinate, y_coordinate; x_increment, y_increment; x_coordinate, y_coordinate; x_increment, y_increment; radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [,chord_angle]; radius, start_angle, sweep_angle [,chord_angle]; polygon_definition;

0 - Odd/Even

1 - non-zero winding

None

B-22

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 23 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.2

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands

(continued)

Command Mnemonic

CHARACTER GROUP

Select Standard Font

Select Alternate Font

Absolute Direction

Relative Direction

Absolute Character Size

Relative Character Size

Character Slant

Extra Space

Standard Font Definition

Alternate Font Definition

Character Fill Mode

Label Origin

Label

Define Label Terminator

Character Plot

Transparent Data

Define Variable Text Path

AD

CF

LO

LB

DT

CP

TD

DV

SS

SA

DI

DR

SI

SR

SL

ES

SD

Parameters

None

None

[run, rise];

[run, rise];

[width, height];

[width, height];

[tangent_of_angle];

[width [,height]]

[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];

[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];

[fill_mode [,edge_pen]];

[position];

[char . . . [char]]1bterm

[1bterm [,mode]];

[spaces, lines];

[mode];

[path [,line]];

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-23

AUG-APPB Page 24 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

H P - G L / 2 C o n t e x t P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s

Figure B.2

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands

(continued)

Command Mnemonic

LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP

Parameters

Line Type

Line Attributes

Pen Width

Pen Width Unit Selection

Select Pen

Symbol Mode

Fill Type

Anchor Corner

Raster Fill Definition

User Defined Line Type

Scale

Input Window

Input P1 and P2

Input Relative P1 and P2

Default Values

Initialize

Rotate Coordinate System

SM

FT

AC

RF

LT

LA

PW

WU

SP

UL

CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP

SC

DF

IN

RO

IW

IP

IR

[line_type [,pattern_length [,mode]]];

[kind, value . . . [,kind, value]];

[width [,pen]];

[type];

[pen];

(required, 1 for black (recommended) or 0 for white)

[char];

[fill_type [,option1 [,option2]]];

[x_coordinate, y_coordinate];

[index [,width, height, pen_nbr . . . pen_nbr]];

(width and height must be less than 255)

[index [,gap1 . . . gapn]];

[x1, x2, y1, y2 [,type [,left, bottom]]]; or

[x1,xfactor,y1,yfactor,2];

[xLL,yLL,xUR,yUR];

[p1x, p1y [,p2x, p2y]];

[p1x, p1y [,p2x, p2y]];

None

[n];

[angle];

B-24

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPB Page 25 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

C o n t r o l C o d e s

Control Codes

Figure B.3

Control Codes

Function Symbol

Backspace B

S

Horizontal Tab H

T

Line Feed

Form Feed

Carriage Return

Shift Out

Shift In

Escape

Space

L

F

F

F

C

R

S

O

S

I

E

C

S

P

Decimal

Value

8

9

10

12

13

14

15

27

32

Description

Move one column left unless at left margin, in which case no action is taken.

Move to next horizontal tab stop. The tab stops are at the left margin, and every eight columns to the right of the left margin.

Move to next print line while maintaining current column position.

Move to the first line at top of the next page while maintaining current column position.

Move to left margin on the current print line.

Select characters that follow from the current secondary font until receipt of a Shift In.

Select characters that follow from the current primary font until receipt of a Shift Out.

Indicates the beginning of a special control sequence (escape sequence).

Move one column to the right unless already at the right margin, in which case no action is taken.

A p p e n d i x B : P r i n t e r C o m m a n d s ( E s c a p e S e q u e n c e s )

B-25

AUG-APPB Page 26 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:10 PM

B-26

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPC Page 1 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:14 PM

Appendix C

I/O Port Polling

C x i d n e p p A

A p p e n d i x C : I / O P o r t P o l l i n g

C-1

AUG-APPC Page 2 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:14 PM

The 4505/4505ps printers provide a parallel port, serial port, and

one

additional network interface port option,

all of which may be active at the same time

.

The 4510/4510ps printers provide a parallel port, serial port, and

three

additional network interface port options,

all of which may be active at the same time

.

To coordinate automatic switching among the ports, the printer monitors the parallel, serial, and network interface ports for incoming data. When a print job is detected on one port, the printer sends a busy signal to the other ports and queues the print job into memory for processing. This is called

port polling

. Note that while all ports may be simultaneously active, only one port at a time is able to receive a print job.

For the 4505/4505ps printers:

When print jobs are pending on all three ports (parallel, serial, and the network interface port), the port polling sequence is:

1 Parallel

2 Serial

3 Network

4 Back to Parallel

C-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPC Page 3 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:14 PM

For the 4510/4510ps printers:

When print jobs are pending on all five ports (parallel, serial, and the network interface ports), the port polling sequence is:

1 Parallel

2 Serial

3 Ethernet

4 Token Ring

5 Back to Parallel

Note

LocalTalk

is not a part of this sequence. When a print job is detected on the LocalTalk port, the print job is put in the queue immediately after any current job finishes.

Except for those on the LocalTalk interface,

print jobs are processed in the sequence in which they are received by the printer

. As soon as one print job has finished, the printer continues polling until it finds another port that has received data.

If a print job is incomplete, the printer waits until the port is inactive for the

Port Timeout

period. After that, the printer ends the incomplete job and continues polling the ports when either:

Auto Job End

is

On

or

• Another print job is received on a port

Therefore, the printer does not excessively service one particular port.

A p p e n d i x C : I / O P o r t P o l l i n g

C-3

AUG-APPC Page 4 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:14 PM

You may set the

Port Timeout

period and

Auto Job End

on the Control Panel or with the RUI. For additional information on

Port Timeout

or

Auto Job End

, either see

Chapter 3: Using the Control Panel

, or refer to the

Document Services for

Printing Guide

.

C-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPD Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

Appendix D

Ordering Information

D x i d n e p p A

Printer Options

....................................................................

D-2

Additional Order Items

.......................................................

D-7

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

D-1

AUG-APPD Page 2 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Printer

Options

Contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox to order any of the printer options listed in Figure D.1.

Note

4505ps and 4510ps Users:

The 4505ps and 4510ps come with these options pre-installed:

• 4 MB SIMM (for a total of 6 MB memory)

• PostScript card

Figure D.1

Printer options

Option/Part No.

Description

Printer Memory

(SIMM)

97K15280 English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

4 MB SIMM

97K15300 English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

16 MB SIMM

Comments

TO INSTALL, go to:

Chapter 5

.

SIMM requirements:

• No parity

• 70 nanosecond access time

• 8 bits

• One-sided

It is recommended that you use a SIMM manufactured by Xerox / Rank Xerox. However, other SIMMs are widely available. Be sure you purchase the correct SIMM configuration.

Note

Even though up to two 16 MB

SIMMs can be installed, the printer recognizes a maximum of 16 MB.

D-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPD Page 3 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1

Printer options

(continued)

Option/Part No.

Description

PostScript

97K15510 English (Xerox)

97K19490 English (Rank Xerox)

97K19500 French

97K19510 German

97K19520 Italian

97K19290 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19530 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

4505 Adobe PostScript

Level 2 language interpreter

Comments

TO INSTALL, go to:

Installation instructions packaged with the option

.

A minimum of 6 MB of memory is required, comprised of 2 MB resident base memory plus one 4 MB SIMM purchased separately. (See

Printer Memory

option, above.)

97K17430 English (Xerox)

97K19790 English (Rank Xerox)

97K19800 French

97K19810 German

97K19820 Italian

97K19300 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19830 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

4510 Adobe PostScript

Level 2 language interpreter

Font Cards

Contact Xerox / Rank Xerox

English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

TO INSTALL, go to:

Chapter 5

.

For PCL5e only.

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

D-3

AUG-APPD Page 4 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1

Printer options

(continued)

Option/Part No.

Description Comments

Network Interfaces

97K15330 English (Xerox)

97K19610 English (Rank Xerox)

97K19620 French

97K19630 German

97K19640 Italian

97K19270 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19650 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Ethernet card

(with BNC and RJ-45 connectors)

97K15320 English (Xerox)

97K19550 English (Rank Xerox)

97K19560 French

97K19570 German

97K19580 Italian

97K19260 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19590 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

LocalTalk card

(with a DIN-8 connector)

97K15340 English (Xerox)

97K19670 English (Rank Xerox)

97K19680 French

97K19690 German

97K19700 Italian

97K19280 Spanish (Xerox)

97K19710 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Token Ring card

(with RJ-45 and female DE-9 connectors)

TO INSTALL, go to:

Installation instructions packaged with the option

.

Ethernet

card includes protocols: Novell

NetWare, TCP/IP, EtherTalk, DEC LAT, and LAN

Manager.

Token Ring

card includes protocols: Novell

NetWare and LAN Manager.

Novell

systems require Print Server v1.2 and above, in the form of:

• PSERVER.VAP for v2.x NetWare file servers

• PSERVER.NLM for v3.x NetWare file servers

• PSERVER.EXE for a stand-alone

PC-based print server

UNIX TCP/IP

systems require:

• Support for lpd or rprint

(Xerox-supplied)

• Clients must support TCP/IP,

TELNET, and UDP

• Optional load hosts require TFTP or

RARP protocols

EtherTalk

systems require AppleTalk Phase 2.

DEC LAT

systems require that clients support the LAT protocol under the VAX/VMS or

ULTRIX-32 operating systems.

LAN Manager

systems require:

• OS/2 version 1.30 or above

• Microsoft’s LAN Manager version

2.1 and above

• TCP/IP on the LAN Manager server

D-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPD Page 5 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1

Printer options

(continued)

Option/Part No.

Description Comments

PAPER HANDLING OPTIONS

Paper Trays

(For paper sizes, refer to the

Chapter 2: Handling Paper

.)

TO INSTALL, go to:

Chapter 2

.

109R00029 English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

250-sheet Universal Tray

Adjustable to:

• A4

• 8.5 x 11 (Letter)

• A5

• Executive

• A4 Transparency or Label

• 8.5 x 11 (Letter) Transparency or Label

109R00031 English (Xerox)

Spanish (Xerox)

250-sheet 8.5 x 14

(Legal) Tray

109R00026 English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

30-Envelope Tray

Adjustable to:

• 8.5 x 11 (Letter)

• 8.5 x 13 (Folio)

• 8.5 x 14 (Legal)

Adjustable to:

• COM-10

• Monarch

• DL

• C5

109R00024 English (Xerox)

Spanish (Xerox)

109R00030 English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

500-sheet 8.5 x 11

(Letter) Tray

500-sheet A4 Tray

8.5 x 11 (Letter)

A4

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

D-5

AUG-APPD Page 6 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

P r i n t e r O p t i o n s

Figure D.1

Printer options

(continued)

Option/Part No.

Description Comments

Lower Base

97K19160 English (Xerox)

109R00105 English (Rank Xerox)

109R00106 French

109R00107 German

109R00108 Italian

97K19330 Spanish (Xerox)

109R00109 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

250-sheet Base with

Universal Tray

109R00111 English (Rank Xerox)

109R00112 French

109R00113 German

109R00114 Italian

109R00115 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

500-sheet Base with A4 Tray

97K19170 English (Xerox)

97K19340 Spanish (Xerox)

500-sheet Base with

8.5 x 11 (Letter) Tray

Trays fit in either the 250-sheet Base or the Standard paper source.

Trays fit in only the 500-sheet Base.

TO INSTALL, go to:

Installation instructions packaged with the option

.

The base attaches to the bottom of the

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.

The base attaches to the bottom of the

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.

The base attaches to the bottom of the

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps.

D-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPD Page 7 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Additional

Order Items

Figure D.2 shows additional items for the 4505/4505ps or

4510/4510ps you may order from your dealer or Xerox / Rank

Xerox.

Figure D.2

Additional order items

Type/Part No.

EP Cartridge

113R5 English (Xerox)

English (Rank Xerox)

French

German

Italian

Spanish (Xerox)

Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Cables

Description Comments

See

Chapter 6: Maintaining the

Printer

for installation instructions.

See

Appendix A: Printer and Cable

Specifications

for cable information.

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

D-7

AUG-APPD Page 8 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2

Additional order items

(continued)

Type/Part No.

Description

Software Diskettes

300E62150 English (Xerox)

300E62150 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62360 French

300E62210 German

300E62460 Italian

300E62410 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62410 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

DS/P Windows 3.1 PCL5e printer drivers diskette

DOS printer drivers diskette 300E62140 English (Xerox)

300E62140 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62350 French

300E62200 German

300E62450 Italian

300E62400 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62400 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62160 English (Xerox)

300E62160 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62370 French

300E62220 German

300E62470 Italian

300E62420 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62420 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62180 English (Xerox)

300E62180 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62390 French

300E62340 German

300E62490 Italian

300E62440 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62440 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62250 English (Xerox)

300E62250 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62580 French

300E62550 German

300E62640 Italian

300E62610 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62610 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

DS/P SETUP and RUI diskette

Xerox TrueType Screen Font Pack diskette

DS/P Service Coordinator (NLM) diskette, and DS/P SMS diskette

Comments

For more information on Xerox software drivers and utilities for the printer, refer to the

Document

Services for Printing Guide

.

D-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPD Page 9 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2

Additional order items

(continued)

Type/Part No.

Description

Software Diskettes

(continued)

300K39990 English (Xerox)

300K39990 English (Rank Xerox)

300K40110 French

300K40000 German

300K40070 Italian

300K40060 Spanish (Xerox)

300K40060 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Disk Kit, containing all of the above

Macintosh PostScript printer driver diskette

300K30151 English (Xerox)

300K30151 English (Rank Xerox)

300K40100 French

300K40090 German

300K40120 Italian

300K40110 Spanish (Xerox)

300K40110 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62240 English (Xerox)

300E62240 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62710 French

300E62700 German

300E62730 Italian

300E62720 Spanish (Xerox)

300E62720 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

300E62260 English (Xerox)

300E62260 English (Rank Xerox)

300E62270 English (Xerox)

300E62270 English (Rank Xerox)

300E64510 English (Xerox)

300E64510 English (Rank Xerox)

Windows PostScript printer drivers diskette

XNIC software DOS distribution diskette

XNIC software UNIX distribution diskette

XNIC software Lan Manager distribution diskette

Comments

For more information on Xerox software drivers and utilities for the printer, refer to the

Document

Services for Printing Guide

.

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

D-9

AUG-APPD Page 10 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2

Additional order items

(continued)

Type/Part No.

Description

User Documentation

720P53350 English (Xerox)

720P53350 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55350 French

720P54350 German

720P57350 Italian

720P56350 Spanish (Xerox)

720P56350 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Quick Reference

Setting Up Guide 720P53020 English (Xerox)

721P53020 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55020 French

720P54020 German

720P57020 Italian

720P56020 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56020 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53030 English (Xerox)

721P53030 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55030 French

720P54030 German

720P57030 Italian

720P56030 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56030 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53040 English (Xerox)

721P53040 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55040 French

720P54040 German

720P57040 Italian

720P56040 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56040 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720S53130 English (Xerox)

721S53130 English (Rank Xerox)

720S55130 French

720S54130 German

720S57130 Italian

720S56130 Spanish (Xerox)

721S56130 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

User’s Guide

Document Services for Printing Guide

Document kit, containing the four preceding documents

Comments

D-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPD Page 11 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

A d d i t i o n a l O r d e r I t e m s

Figure D.2

Additional order items

(continued)

Type/Part No.

Description

User Documentation

(continued)

720P53070 English (Xerox)

721P53070 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55070 French

720P54070 German

720P57070 Italian

720P56070 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56070 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Lower Base Installation Instructions

Networking: Ethernet (XNIC-E’NET)

Installation and Configuration Guide

720P53180 English (Xerox)

721P53180 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55180 French

720P54180 German

720P57180 Italian

720P56180 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56180 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53200 English (Xerox)

721P53200 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55200 French

720P54200 German

720P57200 Italian

720P56200 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56200 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53190 English (Xerox)

721P53190 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55190 French

720P54190 German

720P57190 Italian

720P56190 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56190 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

720P53210 English (Xerox)

721P53210 English (Rank Xerox)

720P55210 French

720P54210 German

720P57210 Italian

720P56210 Spanish (Xerox)

721P56210 Spanish (Rank Xerox)

Networking: LocalTalk (XNIC-L’TALK)

Installation and Configuration Guide

Networking: Token Ring (XNIC-T’RING)

Installation and Configuration Guide

PostScript Installation Instructions

Comments

A p p e n d i x D : O r d e r i n g I n f o r m a t i o n

D-11

AUG-APPD Page 12 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:15 PM

D-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPE Page 1 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM

Appendix E

Environmental

Specifications

E x i d n e p p A

A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

E-1

AUG-APPE Page 2 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM

The Xerox

Commitment to

Environmental

Quality

Xerox Corporation is committed to an international program to safeguard our environment by diverting certain products and materials from the solid waste stream. We do this by reusing serviceable components and remanufacturing selected products.

To support this effort we have made it easy for you to return selected printer equipment and empty print cartridges to Xerox. We recondition the print cartridges and refill them with Xerox toner and developer. All products we manufacture meet our stringent performance standards and are backed by the same Total

Satisfaction Guarantee we offer with our newly manufactured products.

The world-wide effort to remanufacture printer equipment and recondition and reuse print cartridges benefits the environment and conserves our natural resources by reducing waste going into our landfills. Besides, it makes good business sense for Xerox and Xerox customers. Please join us in this effort.

Acoustic

Noise

Figures

(maximums)

Printing:

Warm-up:

Standby:

4505/4505ps

45.0 dB

45.0 dB

40.0 dB

4510/4510ps

50.0 dB

50.0 dB

40.0 dB

E-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPE Page 3 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM

FCC Compliance

Statement for

United States

Users

Class B:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for help.

Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations.

Caution:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Xerox

Corporation could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VDE Compliance

Statement for

International Users

Canadian EME Regulations:

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of

Communications.

Cet appareil numérique est conforme aux limites d’émission de bruits radioélectriques pour les appareils de Classe B stipulées dans le Réglement sur le brouillage radioélectrique du Ministere des

Communications du Canada.

For Rank Xerox:

This laser printer meets the requirements of

EN5022 Class B.

European EME Regulations:

This equipment has been tested and determined to be compliant with VDE requirements for a Class B device.

A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

E-3

AUG-APPE Page 4 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM

Operational

Safety

Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency examination, approval, and compliance with established environmental standards.

Attention to the following notes ensures the continued safe operation of your equipment.

Always

connect the equipment to a properly grounded power source receptacle. If in doubt, have the receptacle checked by a qualified electrician.

WARNING

: Improper connection of the equipment grounding conductor can result in electrical shock.

Always

follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied with, the equipment.

Always

locate the equipment on a solid support surface with adequate strength for the weight of the machine.

Always

exercise care in moving or relocating the equipment.

Always

place the equipment in an area which provides adequate room area for ventilation and servicing.

Always

use the materials and supplies specifically designed for your

Xerox equipment. Use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance and, possibly, a hazardous situation.

Never

use a ground adaptor plug to connect the equipment to a power source receptacle that lacks a ground connection terminal.

Never

attempt any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this documentation.

Never

obstruct ventilation openings. These are provided to prevent overheating.

Never

install the equipment near a radiator or any other heat source.

Never

override or “cheat” electrical or mechanical interlock devices.

Never

push objects of any kind into the ventilation openings.

Never

operate the equipment if you notice unusual noises or odors.

Disconnect the power cord from the power source receptacle and contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox to correct the problem.

If you need any additional safety information concerning the equipment or materials, contact your dealer or Xerox / Rank Xerox.

E-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-APPE Page 5 Black Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM

WARNING:

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in a hazardous radiation exposure.

This product will produce ozone during normal operation. The ozone produced is dependent on copy volume and is heavier than air.

Providing the proper environmental parameters as specified by

Xerox will ensure that concentration levels meet safe limits.

If additional information concerning ozone is needed, request the

Xerox publication (600P83222), “Ozone,” by calling in the USA

1-800-828-6571.

A p p e n d i x E : E n v i r o n m e n t a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

E-5

AUG-APPE Page 6 Black,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:22 PM

Laser Safety

WARNING

: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous light exposure.

This equipment complies with appropriate safety standards.

With specific regard to lasers, the equipment complies with laser product performance standards set by governmental, national, and international agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous light as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer operation and maintenance.

When you perform various operator functions, laser danger labels may be visible. These labels are for your dealer or service technician and are placed on or near panels, or shields, which require a tool for removal.

THESE PANELS ARE NOT TO BE REMOVED BY USERS

OF THE PRINTER. THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE AREAS

INSIDE THESE COVERS.

Laser Safety

Warning for

Finland and

Sweden

Luokitus on tehty standardin EN 60825 mukaisesti

Klassningen är gjord i enlighet met standarden EN 60 825

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

VAROITUS!

Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.

VARNING!

Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksansvisning specficerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som

överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

E-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-GLOS Page 1 Black,Red,Cyan Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Glossary

Accounting File

The file SMS generates for storing printer and job statistics.

An accounting file is created for each

Service Coordinator when DS/P Authorization is set ON in

SETUP. “PRINTER.LOG” is the name of the SMS accounting file.

Alert Message

A message SMS sends to the client that notifies user of an event at the printer.

Attach

The term used in SMS for logging into a file server.

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange.

A digital coding system used to represent characters or control functions electronically, each character being represented by either 7 or 8 bits.

Auto emulation

See Language Sensing.

Baud rate

The data transfer rate between the computer and the printer; set only if the serial port is used. The computer and the printer must be configured at the same baud rate

(between 300 and 57.6 KB depending on the type of computer used).

G l o s s a r y

GL-1

AUG-GLOS Page 2 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Bindery

A data structure on each file server that shows the existence and status of printers on a Novell network.

Bit

Binary digit. The smallest unit of information in a digital computer. A bit can take on the value of either 1 or 0.

Bitmap

A pattern of bits representing the dots in a printed image.

Bitmapped fonts

Digitized images of each character in a font.

Bitmapped fonts generally require more memory than scalable fonts. If you want to change to a different size or style (like

italics

), you have to download a separate bitmapped font.

Boot

To restart a computer without turning off the power.

Also referred to as a soft start.

Byte

A unit of 8 consecutive bits. A byte is used to represent a character or control function.

CAPTURE

A Novell command used to redirect output from a client to a print queue.

Character set

The collection of characters contained in a font.

Each character set has been designed for a special purpose.

Some sets include all printable characters found on most standard computer keyboards, while others are intended for such applications as math, foreign language, typesetting, or law.

Chargeback

See User Chargeback.

Client

A PC attached to a Novell network.

Client Software

See SMS Client Software.

Configuration File

The file that stores the relationship between the SMS Service Coordinator and the printer.

“XDSP.NLM” is the name of the SMS configuration file.

GL-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-GLOS Page 3 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Context saving

See State Saving.

Controller board

The printer’s system controller, with firmware to direct all printer operations and slots for adding optional cards. The controller board is accessed through the back panel of the printer.

Control Panel

An LCD display to show status messages, prompts, and menu items; indicator lights to show the condition and status of the printer; and keys for accessing the printer settings. The Control Panel is on the face of the printer.

Data string

The term used to identify textual data—data that reads as text. SMS accounting export data files present data strings enclosed within quotation marks.

Default

A printer setting that is used in the absence of any other setting or command from the user. (See also Factory-set

Default.)

Default font

The font that the printer will use if the user or the software application does not specify otherwise.

Description

A setting the supervisor defines in the DS/P

UTILITY to specify a printer’s uniqueness. SMS users can locate a printer by its description using the Best Fit feature.

Detach

The term used in SMS for logging off a file server.

Direct-connect printer

A printer tied to a Novell network via its internal network interface card.

Document

One or more pages forming a logical whole.

DOS (Disk Operating System)

The operating system software that controls PC systems. Refer to the DOS manual packaged with your PC system.

Downloaded fonts

See Downloading.

G l o s s a r y

GL-3

AUG-GLOS Page 4 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Downloading

The process of transferring fonts or other data from computer to the printer memory. Permanently downloaded data will be stored in the printer until it is turned off.

Dpi

Dots per inch. A measure of the resolution of a printed image. Laser printers use dots to form images. The greater the dpi, the finer the resolution.

DS/P

Document Services for Printing. The name of Xerox printer utility package comprised of SETUP, DS/P UTILITY,

RUI (Remote User Interface), SMS (Service & Management

Services), and printer drivers.

DS/P UTILITY

The software that allows NetWare supervisors to rename direct-connect printers, to assign them to SMS

Service Coordinators, and to set SMS usage parameters.

Emulation

Imitating the operational functionality of a program or language with equaling or surpassing functionality.

EP cartridge

The Xerox electronic printing cartridge that contains microfine toner and the imaging roller drum.

EPROM/ROM

Acronyms for Erasable Programmable Read

Only Memory and Read Only Memory, which describe a type of computer chip used in the printer. EPROM/ROM is where the firmware and internal fonts reside.

Error messages

1) Messages that appear on the Control Panel display when the printer has encountered some difficulty.

2) Messages sent to the SMS client when either the printer, the SMS Service Coordinator, or Novell has encountered some difficulty.

Escape character

A control code or control character represented by ASCII 27 (1B in Hexadecimal) which must be placed in front of a printer command. The Escape character

GL-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-GLOS Page 5 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

tells the printer to execute, rather than print, the character sequence following it.

Escape sequence

A sequence of characters beginning with an escape code and comprising a printer command.

Factory-set default

The settings that are programmed into the Xerox printer before it is shipped from the manufacturer.

These settings are in use unless you permanently override them using either the printer Control Panel or the Remote

User Interface. Commands from a software application temporarily override factory defaults.

File Server

A network storage device often used to store master copies of applications software. It is also used for exchanging and accessing files without having to copy them to a floppy diskette.

Firmware

The programs stored in EPROM/ROM chips on the printer’s controller board.

Font

A collection of characters with a consistent style.

Different fonts can be selected for printing. Fonts can refer to the printer’s internal fonts, or fonts stored in optional font cards or on your computer.

Font card

Small, thin credit card size electronic devices that contain fonts.

Font characteristics

Font orientation, character height, stroke weight, and typeface. What a printed font looks like.

Fuser roller

Used to bond dry ink to the page.

Handshaking

An exchange of signals between two devices in a computer network, prior to the transfer of data. The purpose of handshaking is to determine the readiness of each device to exchange data.

G l o s s a r y

GL-5

AUG-GLOS Page 6 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Host

The source of data or the input device for the printer. It may be a personal computer or network device.

Hot Key

Keystroke combinations used to activate and exit the

DOS version of SMS.

I/O (Input/Output)

The communication between the printer and the host computer.

I/O port

Input/Output port, where data is received and transmitted.

IVD

See Integrated Visual Display

Integrated Visual Display

Also referred to as IVD, this is the user-interface portion of SMS which displays printer and job status information. It is from the IVD that the user initiates

SMS functions.

Intellifonts

Scalable fonts developed by Agfa Compugraphics and licensed to Hewlett Packard.

Internal fonts

The fonts that come with the printer, residing in permanent memory: EPROM/ROM.

Language Sensing

The ability of a port to sense the PDL

(Page Description Language) of the incoming job and then switch to that PDL if necessary.

Load balancing

An SMS accounting term used for describing the ability to generate printer usage statistics for each selected user.

Local printer

A printer that is connected to a network client through a serial or parallel cable. Only the client user has access to a local printer.

Lower base

The optional base for the 4505/4505ps and

4510/4510ps printers that comes in two sizes: 250-sheet and

500-sheet.

GL-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-GLOS Page 7 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Manual tray

See MP tray.

Menu

Choices of settings and controls. There are menus for the printer’s Control Panel, RUI (Remote User Interface), SMS

(Status & Management Services), and for many software applications.

Memory

The space in a device where information is stored, or the ability of a device to keep information until needed.

(See also RAM, ROM.)

MP tray

Multipurpose tray. The MP tray comes with the

4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers and fits into the multipurpose paper source on the front of the printer. Also referred to as the “manual tray.”

NetWare

This is the network operating system (NOS) developed by Novell for use with its networks.

NetWare Loadable Module

Also referred to as NLM, this is a

NetWare program which runs on the network operating system.

NetWare Supervisor

A user with access to NetWare functionality and control over and above that of normal users.

For example, only users with supervisor privileges can create and delete print queues.

Network Operating System

Also referred to as NOS. The

NOS runs on the file server and serves to control the network.

Network-indirect printer

A printer connected to either: 1) a server running PSERVER.NLM or PSERVER.EXE; or 2) a network client running RPRINTER. EXE.

NIC

An abbreviation for Network Interface Card. The optional card that attaches to the controller board for interfacing with a network. (See also XNIC-E’NET,

XNIC-L’TALK, XNIC-T’RING.)

G l o s s a r y

GL-7

AUG-GLOS Page 8 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

NLM

See NetWare Loadable Module.

NOS

See Network Operating System.

NVM

Nonvolatile Memory. Memory that is not corrupted when power is removed, usually due to battery backup; used to store printer settings while the printer is powered off.

NVRAM

Nonvolatile Random Access Memory.

Offline

When the printer is offline, it does not accept data from the computer.

Online

When the printer is online, it is able to accept data from the computer.

Orientation

Choice of printing portrait (vertically) or landscape (horizontally) on a page.

Output tray

Where printed material is delivered. The output tray on the 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps is located on the top of the printer.

Paper jam

When paper becomes wedged somewhere along the paper path.

Paper source

Paper can feed into the printer, via a paper tray or other paper feeding device. Also, the setting in a software application that specifies from where paper will feed for printing. (The paper source is mapped to a physical tray or a sequence of trays.)

Parallel port

A type of port in which data is transmitted and received in bytes rather than bits. Typically used for local printing over short distances.

Parity

The addition of one or more redundant bits of information used to verify its accuracy.

PC

Personal Computer; specifically, an IBM PC or compatible.

GL-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-GLOS Page 9 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

PCL 5e

Hewlett Packard Printer Control Language Level 5e.

PCONSOLE

A Novell utility that provides, for example, the user with the ability to create and delete queues, or to display a list of jobs currently in the print queue.

PDL

Page Description Language. The set of rules that describe a fully formatted page, independent of the device used for printing. PCL and PostScript are examples of page description languages.

Permanent fonts

Also called permanently downloaded fonts.

These are fonts set up in an application so that when the application is loaded, the fonts are downloaded to the printer’s memory. They then do not have to be downloaded for every print job. Permanent fonts remain downloaded until the printer is powered OFF.

Pitch

The number of characters to the inch (10 pitch is 10 characters per inch). Typically thought of as “horizontal” measurement.

Point

Type height is traditionally measured in points. One point is approximately 1/72 inch. Typically thought of as

“vertical” measurement.

Polling

A method to control the data coming into the printer through the I/O ports, which can include the parallel, serial, and optional network ports. The printer looks at each port in succession for incoming data, then transfers it to the print buffer where it waits for processing. The print buffer is shared among the ports, so data can arrive for different jobs continuously.

PostScript

A PDL developed by Adobe Systems in 1987.

Print density

The relative darkness of print on the page.

G l o s s a r y

GL-9

AUG-GLOS Page 10 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Print queue

A subdirectory on the server to which print jobs are redirected. Jobs are released from the queue and sent to the printer when the printer is ready to accept jobs.

Print server

A computer system attached to a local area network that provides shared printing among network clients. The print server draws files from print queues on the file server. Typically the print server is dedicated only to that function—it is not used to run other end-user software.

Printer description

See Description.

Printer driver

A program that communicates between the printer and the software application. The printer driver interprets special format codes so the printer can print a page that matches what you created on the screen. Xerox desktop laser printers have their own printer drivers so you can take full advantage of the printer’s features.

Printer macro

Used by the page description language to send often-repeated commands and specifications, such as linefeed and carriage return information. (Printer macros are transparent to the user.)

Printer name

The default name assigned to each Xerox NIC, for example, XNExxxxxx_1, or another valid printer name the user chooses and assigns when running SETUP. See Valid

Printer Name.

Printer reset

See Reset.

Protocol

A set of rules governing the exchange of data between data processing devices.

PSERVER emulation

Software that runs on a file server or a network interface card and that enables the file server or printer to function as a print server.

Queue

See Print Queue.

GL-10

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-GLOS Page 11 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Radio button

A type of feature selection device found in the

RUI and SMS Client Software. The radio button is used for selecting one option among a group of mutually exclusive options.

RAM

Random Access Memory—read and write memory. This is commonly referred to as just “memory.” RAM is available on RAM chips and holds information that is used by the printer. The information may be discarded at the end of a print job, when you exit an application, or when the printer is reset, depending on what kind of information it is: incoming data for printing, downloaded soft fonts or printer macros for the current PDL.

Reset

To restore the printer to all or some of its default settings.

ROM

Read-Only Memory.

RPRINTER emulation

Software run on a client PC (connect to a network-indirect printer) or a Xerox network interface card that identifies the printer as a remote printer.

RUI

Remote User Interface. The RUI is a DS/P component that runs on a PC and allows the user to select printer settings from the PC rather than at the printer’s Control Panel.

Scalable fonts

Fonts described by formulae that produce a font outline. The formulae can be used to scale the font up or down (by point size).

SDF

See Standard Data File.

Serial port

A type of port in which data is transmitted and received in bits rather than bytes. Typically used for printing over longer distances.

Server

A special-purpose computer system (typically a PC using a 80386 or 80486 CPU, or another processor based on

G l o s s a r y

GL-11

AUG-GLOS Page 12 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

the Motorola 68000 CPU) that is connected to the local area network and controls shared peripherals (PCs, printers, etc.).

Service Coordinator

The NLM portion of SMS that obtains job and status information from direct-connect printers and reports it to users running SMS Client Software. The Service

Coordinator also acquires and stores accounting data generated by the printer assigned to it during SETUP. (The relationship between the printer and the Service Coordinator is stored in the Configuration File.)

SIMM

Single Inline Memory Module. A SIMM has several connected memory chips and connects to a slot on the printer controller board to increase the available RAM on the printer.

The 4505/4505ps and 4510/4510ps printers have two SIMM slots and will accept SIMMs with 4 MB or 16 MB of memory, running at 70 ns (nanoseconds).

SMS

Status & Management Services. A DS/P component that resides on the client PC and the file server. SMS features include, but are not limited to, the ability to view the status of various network printers and jobs in their queue, find the best printer for the job, and generate accounting reports.

SMS Client Software

The Integrated Visual Display (IVD) portion of SMS the end-user runs on the PC.

Spooling

A portion of memory (in this case on the printer) that will hold documents to be processed by the printer. This frees up the computer to go on with other work.

Stand-alone

Not connected, directly or indirectly, to a network. A stand-alone printer is connected to a PC through a serial or parallel cable.

Standard Data File

A data file format that can be read by many software applications. SDF files contain data elements delimited by any special character, typically the comma. Each logical record in an SDF file is terminated by a carriage

GL-12

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-GLOS Page 13 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

return. SMS accounting export data files are stored in SDF format.

State Saving

A PCL Menu option that enables you to save permanent fonts and macros when jobs switch between PCL and PostScript.

String

See Data String.

Supervisor

See NetWare Supervisor.

Temporary fonts

These are PCL fonts downloaded with a particular print job and cleared from memory when the job is finished.

Toner

A dry powdered substance used in the printing process. The toner supply for the printer is contained in the recyclable EP (electronic printing) cartridge.

TrueRes Smoothing

A PCL capability that smooths curves in text and graphics to improve print quality.

TrueType fonts

A font standard developed by Apple

Computer as an alternative to Adobe Postscript. TrueType fonts are scalable and can print in both PostScript and PCL page description languages.

TSR

Terminate and Stay Resident. The SMS TSR is a program that is loaded into the PC’s memory each time the user starts the PC. The SMS TSR is responsible for routing status information to the IVD, and displaying alert messages on the client’s monitor.

Typeface

The design of a set of characters and symbols—all uppercase and lowercase letters, arabic numerals, and common punctuation and symbols. Typefaces often bear the name of the person who designed them, like Bodoni and

Garamond.

G l o s s a r y

GL-13

AUG-GLOS Page 14 Black,Red Saturday, January 21, 1995 7:29 PM

Universal paper tray

Called “universal” because it adjusts to a variety of paper sizes.

User chargeback

An SMS accounting term defining the ability to generate user printing costs typically calculated by multiplying the number of pages printed by the cost-per-page value.

Valid printer name

A printer name that does not begin with the letters “DSP” and that terminates with the characters

“_1”.

XNIC-E’NET

Xerox Network Interface Card-Ethernet. (See also NIC.)

XNIC-L’TALK

Xerox Network Interface Card-LocalTalk. (See also NIC.)

XNIC-T’RING

Xerox Network Interface Card-Token Ring.

(See also NIC.)

GL-14

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s o r 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-IX Page 1 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM

Index

A

Adjusting print density 6-12

Auto Continue option

System Menu

3-59

Auto Job End option also see

Port Timeout option

Ethernet Menu

3-53

Parallel Menu

3-43

Serial Menu

3-47

Token Ring Menu 3-56

B

Baud Rate option

Serial Menu

3-48

Bidirectional option

Parallel Menu 3-44

Bitmapped fonts

4-3

C

Cable specifications A-7

Cancel PS Job function

Reset Menu 3-66

Chime option

System Menu

3-58

Cleaning see

Printer maintenance

Config. Sheet function

Test Menu 3-62

Configuration Sheet

3-14, 3-62,

7-7

Context saving, see

State

Saving option

3-28

Control Panel

Display 3-4

Indicator Lights, see

Control

Panel indicator lights

Keys, see

Control Panel keys

Location

1-3

Menu options

3-12 to 3-66

Messages 7-5 to 7-18

Navigating 3-8 to 3-11

Overview

3-3

Control Panel indicator lights

3-5

Form Feed

3-5

Online

3-5

Ready

3-5

I n d e x

IX-1

AUG-IX Page 2 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM

D

Control Panel keys

3-6 to 3-7

Down

3-7

Enter

3-7

Esc 3-7

Form Feed 3-6

Menu

3-6

Online

3-6

Reset

3-6

Up

3-7

Copies option

PCL Menu

3-19

PostScript Menu

3-32

D

Data Bits option

Serial Menu 3-49

Default Source option

PCL Menu

3-21

Default Tray option

PostScript Menu

3-32

Defaults option

System Menu

3-60

Deutsch option

Language

3-14

Documentation

D-10

Down key

3-7

Downloading fonts 4-13 to 4-15

Drilled paper

Loading

2-20

DTR Polarity option

Serial Menu

3-48

E

Emulation, see

Lang. Sensing option, State

Saving option

English option

Language

3-14

Enter key

3-7

Envelopes

Loading

2-21

EP cartridge

Recycling

6-3

Replacing 6-3 to 6-8

Esc key

3-7

Español option

Language 3-14

Ethernet Menu

3-51 to 3-53

Options

3-51 to 3-53

Auto Job End

3-53

Frame Type

3-53

Lang. Sensing

3-52, 4-9

Port Timeout 3-51

System Language 3-51

F

Flow control, see

Handshake option

Font Number option

PCL Menu 3-20

Font Source option

PCL Menu

3-19

Fonts

Adobe PostScript (Type 1)

4-9

Bitmapped 4-3

Definition 4-3

Downloading

1-5, 4-13 to 4-15

Font card

4-4, 4-10

Installing

5-19 to 5-20

Slot location

1-3

Font Family 4-3

Intellifont 4-7

PCL bitmap

4-8

Permanently downloaded

4-14

Printer

4-4

Scalable

4-3

Screen 4-4

TrueType 4-6

Form Feed indicator 3-5

Form Feed key

3-6

Form Length option

PCL Menu

3-24

Frame Type option

Ethernet Menu

3-53

Français canad. option

Language 3-14

Français option

Language

3-14

Front Cover

Location

1-3

IX-2

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-IX Page 3 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM

Fuser cleaning cycle

Procedure

6-9 to 6-10

Fuser Cleaning function

Test Menu

3-64

H

Handshake option

Serial Menu

3-48

Hex Dump option

System Menu

3-58

I

Intellifont Fonts

4-7

Interface network A-14 parallel

A-7 serial

A-10, A-12

Interface Menu

3-37 to 3-56

Ethernet Menu, see

Ethernet Menu

LocalTalk Menu, see

LocalTalk Menu

Parallel Menu, see

Parallel Menu

Serial Menu, see

Serial Menu

Token Ring Menu, see

Token Ring Menu

Italiano option

Language

3-14

J

Jam Recovery option

Effect on memory

3-68

PCL Menu

3-26

PostScript Menu

3-35

L

Labels

Loading

2-20

Lang. Sensing option

Ethernet Menu

3-52

Parallel Menu

3-42

Serial Menu 3-46

H

Language

Options

Deutsch

3-14

English 3-14

Español 3-14

Français

3-14

Français canad.

3-14

Italiano

3-14

Portuguése (BRA)

3-14

Letterhead

Loading

2-20

LocalTalk Menu

3-50

Option

3-50

Port Timeout

3-50

Lower base

2-13

Lower source

Location

2-4

Lower tray

2-13

Loading paper 2-14 to 2-17

Location

2-8

M

Main Menu system

3-12 to 3-66

Interface Menu, see

Interface Menu

PCL Menu, see

PCL Menu

PostScript Menu, see

PostScript Menu

System Menu, see

System Menu

Test Menu, see

Test Menu

Maintenance see

Printer maintenance

Manual Size option

PostScript Menu 3-34

Memory

Adding, see

SIMM, Installing

Maximum capacity

1-6

Overview 1-6

Memory Check function

Test Menu

3-64

Menu key 3-6

Modem, null

A-14

MP Tray Size option

PCL Menu

3-23

Multipurpose (MP) source

Location

2-4

I n d e x

IX-3

AUG-IX Page 4 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM

N

Multipurpose (MP) tray

N

O

Default Source option

3-21

Feeding paper

2-18 to 2-19

Location 1-3, 2-8

Manual Size option 3-34

MP Tray Size option

3-23

Tray Switching option

3-33

Network interface

Network ports

Location

1-3

Null modem A-14

A-14

Online indicator

3-5

Online key

3-6

2-11 to 2-12

Options

5-2, D-2

Ordering information

D-1

Orientation option

PCL Menu 3-23

Output tray

Capacity

2-5

Location

1-3, 2-5

P

Page Protection option

Effect on memory

3-67

PCL Menu

3-26

Paper

Feeding, see

Paper feeding

Input sources

2-4

Input trays

2-8

Jams

2-5, 2-28, 3-6, 3-26, 3-35, 3-68, 7-19 see also

Jam Recovery option

Output tray

2-5

Output tray capacity 2-5

Size

2-6

Weight

2-6

Paper feeding

Multipurpose (MP) tray

2-18 to 2-19

Paper jams

7-19

Paper loading

Drilled paper

2-20

Envelopes

2-21

Labels 2-20

Letterhead 2-20

Lower tray

2-14 to 2-17

Standard tray

2-14 to 2-17

Paper Size option

PCL Menu 3-23

Paper sources

Lower

Location

2-4

Multipurpose (MP)

Location

2-4

Selecting 2-22 to 2-34

PCL paper sources 2-22

Printing a page

2-23 to 2-24

Source mapping settings

2-26 to 2-27

Standard

Location

2-4

Paper trays

250-sheet capacity

2-9, 2-13

500-sheet capacity

2-13

Lower

2-13

Location

2-8

Multipurpose (MP) 2-11 to 2-12

Location

2-8

Output

Location

2-5

Standard

2-9 to 2-10

Location

2-8

Parallel interface

A-7

Parallel Menu

3-41 to 3-44

Options

3-41 to 3-44

Auto Job End

3-43

Bidirectional

3-44

Lang. Sensing 3-42, 4-9

Port Enable

3-41

Port Timeout

3-41

System Language

3-41

Transfer Rate

3-44

Parallel port

Location 1-3

Parity option

Serial Menu

3-49

PCL Font List function

Test Menu

3-63

IX-4

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

AUG-IX Page 5 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM

R

PCL language, see

System Language option

PCL Menu

3-15 to 3-28

Options 3-18 to 3-28

Copies

3-19

Default Source

3-21

Font Number

3-20

Font Source

3-19

Form Length

3-24

Jam Recovery 3-26

MP Tray Size

3-23

Orientation

3-23

Page Protection

3-26

Paper Size

3-23

Pitch

3-20

Point Size 3-21

Resolution

3-27

Source Mapping

3-22

State Saving

3-28

Symbol Set

3-25

TrueRes

3-27

Pitch option

PCL Menu 3-20

Point Size option

PCL Menu

3-21

Port Enable option

Parallel Menu 3-41

Serial Menu 3-45

Port Timeout option also see

Auto Job End option

Ethernet Menu

3-51

LocalTalk Menu 3-50

Parallel Menu

3-41

Serial Menu

3-45

Port Type option

Serial Menu

3-47

Ports

Network

Location

1-3

Parallel

Location

1-3

Serial

Location 1-3

Portuguése (BRA) option

Language

3-14

PostScript fonts 4-9

PostScript language, see

System Language option

PostScript Menu

3-29 to 3-36

Options

3-32 to 3-36

Copies

3-32

Default Tray 3-32

Jam Recovery 3-35

Manual Size

3-34

Print Errors

3-34

Resolution

3-35

State Saving

3-36

Tray Switching 3-33

TrueRes 3-35

Power outlet

Location

1-3

Power Saver option

System Menu 3-60

Power Switch

Location

1-3

Pre-printed stationery, see

Letterhead

Print density adjusting

6-12

Print Density option

System Menu

3-59

Print Errors option

PostScript Menu 3-34

Print quality problems

7-29

Printer maintenance

Cleaning the printer

6-13

EP cartridge replacement

6-3 to 6-8

Fuser cleaning 6-9 to 6-10

Moving the printer

6-14

Printer operational problems 7-26

PS Font List function

Test Menu

3-63

R

Ready indicator

3-5

Remote User Interface 1-4

Reset All function

Reset Menu

3-66

Reset I/f Cards function

Reset Menu

3-66

Reset key

3-6

I n d e x

IX-5

AUG-IX Page 6 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM

S

Reset Menu

3-65 to 3-66

Functions

3-65 to 3-66

Cancel PS Job

3-66

Reset All 3-66

Reset I/f Cards 3-66

Reset Menus

3-66

Reset Printer

3-66

Reset Menus function

Reset Menu 3-66

Reset Printer function

Reset Menu

3-66

Resolution option

Effect on memory

3-68

PCL Menu 3-27

PostScript Menu

3-35

RUI 1-4

S

Scalable fonts

4-3

Serial interface

RS-232C A-10

RS-422A

A-12

Serial Menu 3-45 to 3-49

Options

3-45 to 3-49

Auto Job End 3-47

Baud Rate

3-48

Data Bits

3-49

DTR Polarity

3-48

Handshake

3-48

Lang. Sensing

3-46, 4-9

Parity 3-49

Port Enable

3-45

Port Timeout

3-45

Port Type

3-47

Stop Bits

3-49

System Language

3-45

Serial number

Locating 7-4

Serial port

Location

1-3

SIMM

Capacity 5-2

Definition 5-2

Installing

5-4 to 5-18

Source Mapping option

PCL Menu

3-22

IX-6

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

Specifications, cable

A-7

Standard source

Location 2-4

Standard tray

2-9 to 2-10

Loading paper

2-14 to 2-17

Location

2-8

State Saving option

Effect on memory 3-68

PCL Menu

3-28

PostScript Menu

3-36

Stop Bits option

Serial Menu

3-49

Symbol Set option

PCL Menu

3-25

System Language option

Ethernet Menu

3-51

Parallel Menu

3-41

Serial Menu

3-45

Token Ring Menu 3-55

System Menu

3-57 to 3-60

Options

3-58 to 3-60

Auto Continue

3-59

Chime

3-58

Defaults 3-60

Hex Dump

3-58

Power Saver

3-60

Print Density

3-59

System Messages

3-58

System Messages option

System Menu 3-58

T

Test Menu 3-61 to 3-64

Functions

3-62 to 3-64

Config. Sheet

3-62

Fuser Cleaning 3-64

Memory Check

3-64

PCL Font List

3-63

PS Font List

3-63

Test Print

3-63

Test Print function

Test Menu 3-63

Timeout, see

Port Timeout option

AUG-IX Page 7 Black,Cyan Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM

Token Ring Menu

3-54 to 3-56

Options

3-54 to 3-56

Auto Job End

3-56

Lang. Sensing 4-9

System Language 3-55

Toner, see

EP cartridge

Transfer Rate option

Parallel Menu

3-44

Tray Switching option

PostScript Menu

3-33

Troubleshooting

7-1 to 7-36

Before calling service

7-2

Control Panel messages

7-5

Locating serial number 7-4

Operational problems 7-26

Paper jams

7-19

Print quality problems

7-29

TrueRes option

PCL Menu 3-27

PostScript Menu

3-35

TrueType fonts 4-6

Type 1 fonts, see

PostScript fonts

U

Up key

3-7

U

I n d e x

IX-7

AUG-IX Page 8 Black Friday, February 3, 1995 12:39 AM

IX-8

4 5 0 5 / 4 5 0 5 p s a n d 4 5 1 0 / 4 5 1 0 p s U s e r ’ s G u i d e

advertisement

Key Features

  • 600 dpi and 300 dpi resolutions for sharp, clear prints
  • Print speed of five pages per minute for quick and efficient printing
  • Monthly page volume of up to 10,000 pages for high-volume printing needs
  • Compact size and sleek design for easy placement in any workspace
  • Easy-to-use control panel with intuitive menu system for simple operation
  • Variety of paper handling options for printing on different paper sizes and types
  • Optional font card for expanding printing capabilities with additional fonts
  • PCL and PostScript printing languages for compatibility with a wide range of software applications

Frequently Answers and Questions

What is the print resolution of the Xerox 4505/4505ps?
The Xerox 4505/4505ps offers print resolutions of 600 dpi and 300 dpi, ensuring sharp and clear prints.
How fast is the Xerox 4505/4505ps?
The Xerox 4505/4505ps has a print speed of five pages per minute, making it efficient for both small and large printing tasks.
How many pages can the Xerox 4505/4505ps print per month?
The Xerox 4505/4505ps has a monthly page volume of up to 10,000 pages, making it suitable for high-volume printing environments.
What paper sizes can the Xerox 4505/4505ps handle?
The Xerox 4505/4505ps offers a variety of paper handling options, including a standard paper tray for letter and A4 paper, and an optional multipurpose tray for envelopes, transparencies, and other specialty paper types.
Can I add more fonts to the Xerox 4505/4505ps?
Yes, you can expand the printing capabilities of the Xerox 4505/4505ps by installing an optional font card, which allows you to add additional fonts to the printer's memory.
What printing languages does the Xerox 4505/4505ps support?
The Xerox 4505/4505ps supports both PCL and PostScript printing languages, providing compatibility with a wide range of software applications.

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents